Home

Hard Disk Manager™ 14 Suite

Contents

1. csccscsceccecscsccccccscsccccccscsceccecscsceccececncescececscescececsceseececscesescecscesens 12 Supported TECNNOlOCIES srccicctcscectcaicnrccs tinea E a E E E E T i 12 Supported Virtualization Software sessesesessesessesesoecesoecessecessececesoesoscecescecssoecesceosesecesoecesoesesoecesseceseeceeee 13 SPOe Vra aa OVC E E E E EE E 13 Supported virtual machines for P2V SCENALIOS cccccccssscccceeseccceesececcueccceeuseceseuececeueceeseesecessunecessugeceseeuecetsunecetsueceesenes 13 Supported File SYST GINS issirinksi ENA A E E A T T Rin 13 Suppor ed Media eorne E TE 13 Ea SUA e E E E E E E E O E T 14 SVEM REGUN EMENT S crcircir oireen NAE EE E EEEE ESE 14 AEE aE E EE EE E EIE A A O EEE E A ET 15 INST SCAU a E E E 16 Buldime Recovery Media aeres eE A E E EEE 16 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media cssscssscsssssscssccssccescnscccsccesenscccsecescsscesscessssseussseseseceessees 17 De I seaacccpo ets de cerca E A one otceeas pi Gauies E E E E pee peaeccaens 17 2107 68 gg ca g e er teRe et ist rarer eens eaen ete eer er eee Ce eh ee eee eee re ee ee re ee eer rae ee reer eres 17 Booting from the WinPE Recovery Meia cscsccccscscscsecscscsccccccscsccccecscnceccecscsceccecscncescecscncescececsceseccecces 20 DC CO ances bene E E E teenies anctacoant 20 BASIC CONC ODS aers E A E EE 21 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved System and D ta PrOCCCEION visccuie ce cniecuicda ain
2. BOOTNXT File 1 Bytes checkvendor mst File 20 KB 2 config sys File 10 Bytes pagefile sys File 1 GB PAT_Dell_GUI_BMB_ea_xU msi File 75 5 MB i C E ewanfile eve File ore T To continue click Next Data size to restore less than 14 8 GB 6 On the How to Restore page specify the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to Original location Original location The files and tolg Speciic folder ie Bn your computer he place where they were archived from When restoring f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the orginal location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 7 Onthe Restore Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Please overview the restore options ou can return to the coresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to Restore Object s selected 1 Total data size 71 9 MB 75 470 533 Bytes Specihied restore destination Destination path E S Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 588 853 760 Bytes 8 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 9 Inthe Progress window you c
3. Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 161 Look in Local Disk C EX g Hame Size Date ar ere eerrerereortoase ee arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM are_09101 3133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM are_091013140817551 10 9 2073 11 08 51 PM are_09101314082580 10 10 2013 6 48 04 4M G DIFFI30259964840000000 10 10 2013 6 48 04 AM FLOOOOO0000000000000 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM el archive pfi 49MB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM Ge archive pfp 23KB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM e Jtask_file pft 40 Bytes 10 10 2013 6 48 04 AM e arc _091013140825801 pbf 18MB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM e arc _091013140825801 pfi SFB KB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM bela are_091073140825801 pfm 1566 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM i Ei Se ee eee a a ee ee ee a T N Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total sze 71 9 MB 75 4 70 833 Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File C sarc 0910131408258017 DIFF130258864840000000 archive pfi Base archive C a 091013140825501 arc 09701 314
4. 1 Inthe main window select the required logical volume on the Disk Map Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Local Disk C 280 3 GB NTFS Hew Volume E 219 3 GE NTFS 2 Calla context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Make Partition Primary dialog Backup Capz 219 3 GB Disk Dev Disk Dev Hew Volume F 292 5 GB NTFS Disk Dev EEH Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CO DWD or BD Copy Partition Restore Partition Adjust 05 Format Partition Delete Partition Mowe Resize Partition Convert File Syster Defragment Partition Defragment MFT Compact MFT Change Volume Label Remowe Drive Letter Hide Partition Make Partition Primary 3 Confirm the operation by clicking the Yes button By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you can either confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them or continue work in the virtual mode GP Are you sure you want ta make the partition primary Tou are about to make the partition F New Yolume NTFS primary 4 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Merge Partitions any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 5 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to merge as the right one will be selected automatically
5. Environment As you see successful migration of a Windows system to a different hardware platform involves several actions 1 Change of the Windows kernel settings according to the new configuration The program detects the given hardware profile and automatically installs the appropriate Windows HAL and kernel 2 Installation of drivers for boot critical devices The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository strongly recommending not to proceed until all drivers for the found boot critical devices are installed In case drivers for these devices are installed but disabled they will be enabled 3 Installation of drivers for a PS 2 mouse and keyboard This action will only be accomplished for Windows XP Server 2003 4 Installation of drivers for network cards The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository These actions guarantee a Windows system will start up on dissimilar hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers a
6. Create new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager for destination hard drive 8 Unmark checkboxes opposite unnecessary files or folders to try to fit into the destination disk We do not recommend you to exclude system files but those that could take plenty of disk space like video music photos etc Once you re ready with the exclusion click OK to let the wizard calculate the resulted size of the partition Change copy options Please select what Files and Folders should be migrated along with the system Name Size Date OE eM Cookies g 3 2013 11 08 02 AM V Desktop 3 3 2013 11 08 35 AM ta di Documents 9 32013 11 08 36 AM M di Downloads 9 32013 11 08 36 AM ta di Favorites gi32013 11 08 55 AM Links 3 3 2013 11 08 37 AM ta di Local Settings 9 32013 11 08 02 AM V Music g 3 2013 11 08 35 AM Ji ta di My Documents 3 2013 11 08 01 4M NetHood OS2013 11 08 01 AM he 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM VS PrintHood g 3 2013 11 08 01 AM V Recent 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Saved Games 9 3 2013 11 08 36 AM V Searches OSI2013 1 46 02 PM V SendTo g 3 2013 11 08 02 AM M Start Menu 9 3 2013 11 08 02 AM ta di Templates 9 32013 11 08 02 AM Y videos 9 3 2013 11 08 35 AM Y NTUSER DAT SiZKB 9 3 2013 1 57 05 PM H 4 ntuser dat Loal 372KB 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Y J ntuser dat Loa2 124
7. GE 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GB AR virtual Drives Call a context menu for the selected file folder by the right mouse click to export it to some other location local or network drive etc E LocaDikic A g Address ON Disk Drives E PefLogs 8 22 2013 12 50 47 AM Ej H i Program Files 10 14 2013 10 48 56 PM ie Users 9 3 2013 3 24 45 PM Re Windows 9 3 2013 10 55 03 AM e 5 Dvo Drive D H NEW VOLUME E fl New Volume F Network Places Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 100 Available operation scenarios e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup The current version of the program does not enable to access pVHD images and file archives with Volume Explorer File Transfer Wizard File Transfer Wizard is designed to make such operations as copying of separate files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible It may be of particular use in case of a system malfunction caused either by a virus attack or files corruption in order to get the system back on track again Besides it provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Startup e Click Tool Button then select File Transfer Wizard Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject S
8. Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Comment My hdd 1 Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GB File Earc new arc new pbt Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Check Recovery Discs You ve got the ability to check whether backup media created with the program is 100 percent error free and ready to use The Check Recovery Disc Wizard will help you do that Startup e Click Tool Button then select Check Recovery Discs There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Startup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation CD DVD drive Select from the pull down list of available CD DVD devices the required drive to use during the operation Drive NECVMivar iM ware IDE CDAIO Eject the disc after check Set whether to eject the disk after the operation is completed or not Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 107 Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Send Log Files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to
9. thus providing the maximum possible security level Scheduling The automation of operations is particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis For example developing a specific project on a day to day basis and having to make a backup every evening so as not to lose the valuable data you will really appreciate when this kind of routine operations will be carried out automatically without your participation Another aspect of any automation process is that it allows an optimization of your computer s work load This is especially important when operations require a considerable amount of computer resources processor time memory and more A number of tasks which can decrease the performance can be run during the night or whenever the computer has the least work load to perform The program has a special tool for scheduling You can set out a timetable for any operation and it will start at a specified time without interrupting your current activity Windows Components In the given section you can find all the information necessary to successfully work with the Windows version of the product Interface Overview This chapter introduces the graphical interface of the program The design of the interface precludes any mistake being made on the part of the user Most operations are performed through the system of wizards Buttons and menus are accompanied by easy understandable icons Neverthel
10. 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 141 Please select the file with partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Archive path 2013 Oct1111 53 52 Partition am READE a 2013 Oct 11 11 17 06 Partition farc_111013111 2013 Oct1111 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct1111 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 02 49 50 Disk Img_DO pfi Select Image HDDO Part2 arc_111013111635639 arc_11101311 6 Onthe Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview i l E File System Size Used Volumelabel Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164MB New Volume Primary NTFS 8 4 GB 6 9 MB New Volume Archive details Image of the hard disk Archive path fmntidisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbt Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 To continue restore process click Next 7 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image
11. Apple HFS without reformatting e Mount a partition assign a drive letter of any file system type to make it available for your operating system e Modify file system parameters make active inactive hide unhide etc e Install New OS Wizard to make a system ready to install a new operating system e Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover an accidentally deleted partition Wipe Facilities e Data wiping to successfully destroy all on disk information including the standard bootstrap code and other system service structures e Free space clearing to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data Automatization Facilities e Task scheduling to automate routine operations It can be particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 12 Oo Scheduling is only available for the Windows installation of the program Auxiliary Facilities e Conversion of basic MBR disks to basic GPT to enjoy all benefits of the newest partitioning scheme with minimal effort e File Transfer Wizard to make such operations as transferring of files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible Providing access to Paragon backups as regular folders it may also help to replace corrupted data from a previously created image in case of an operating system failure e Volume Ex
12. Change Volurne Label Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Mware Remove Drive Letter J Unallocated Hide Partition 6 At first shift the right edge of the partition to the right then do the same with the left edge Make sure the partition size has been left unchanged Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 178 w Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to moveresize NTFS volume Data E Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey T oe Unallocated o Data E 123 5 GE 184 6 GE NTFS Volume size 1 64 087 MB 25 000 MB 315 647 MB Free space before 1 26 554 MB 0 bytes 290 640 MB Free space after 0 Bytes 0 bytes 290 640 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exact as it was but will require more time es No 7 Now you can resize the extended partition to take the block of free space out of it Call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Oo Call a context menu for the extended partition with the blue border not the logical one 8 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the extended partition to the right w Are you sure you want to move resize extended partition on disk 0 Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey G Cr
13. From the pull down list you can choose whether to restore contents of the backup image to its original location or specify some other one Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location b he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring Mes ma arean ereton pour computer f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the orginal location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup Besides if you select the Original location option you can additionally define whether to replace already existing files during the restore operation good for recovering presumably corrupted files or leave them intact good for recovering accidentally deleted files Sector Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 61 Please select one of the objectis to restore Name Type File system Size Used gt Eee E eae ce maces Internal Hard Disk Drive 120 GB New Volume Li Primary NTFS 14 2 GB 163 8 MB ES NEW VOLUME E Primary Linus Ext 8 3 GE 281 9 MB P NEW VOLUME H Primary FATE OMB O Bytes GGinew VO
14. Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 Inthe PTS DOS launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in Linux as well 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Onthe What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Please select the file with partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Created on Type Archive path 2013 Oct14 11 48 28 Partition imedia CD1 linux 1 Select Image imedia CDL linus IMG D1 PBF 7 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Partition preview NTFS Archive details Type Image of the partit
15. Normal Safe Low Graphics Safe in the Boot menu Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Boot menu 32 bit environment a Normal Mode Main recovery 4 Safe Mode environnent 4 Low Graphics Safe Mode amp Floppy disk Hard disk H MBR amp Find OSes on your hard disks e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Low Graphics Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS safe mode In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu e Floppy Disk Reboot the computer from a system floppy disk e Hard Disk 0 Boot from the primary hard disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 18 e Find OS s on your hard disks The program will scan hard disks of your computer to find any bootable operating system 64 bit environment BOOT MENU Start Paragon RCO in sate mode Reboot Power ott e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses th
16. Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No commen Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 130 8 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a differential backup of the selected partition It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk the Backup Capsule or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a file increment to a full partition backup To update only files you need since the last full partition backup please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create File Complement 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any z Is E 1079 2013 7 08 28 AM MEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 5 ME G 1079 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 5 KE i T 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM Mew Volu
17. You can choose the desired partition type from the pull down list As a matter of fact the available alternatives fundamentally depend on the selected block of free space within the Logical free space only Logical partitions can be created Within the Primary free space both Primary partitions or the Extended Partition can be created e Partition Size Define the size in Mb of the new partition e Free space before Define the position in Mb of the new partition relative to the beginning of the block of free space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the new partition Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available e File system for new partition From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification e Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To act
18. e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 147 Name Size Date E pool Wweerverz Z a di Audio 62013 4 23 25 AM di 4 16 2013 12 29 46 4AM Backup Storage 10 10 2013 12 52 24 AM di arc 091013125156058 1071072013 12 51 36 4M Ji arc 091013133756622 1071072013 1 43 35 4M di diff_ 10101 3084041 587 1071072013 2 00 08 4M gt arc 091013133756622 pt 47 MB 10 9 2073 6 38 02 AM gt arc 091013133756622 pfi K RFE RB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM Pot iela jaro 091013133756622 ptm TERE 10 9 2073 6 38 02 AM Switch bo Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume E Comment Mo comment is available Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used space 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File 2l Backup Storage anc_O9101731 33756622 pbt 5 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore In our case it is the first partition of the disk Please select one of the objectis to restore Name Type File sstem Size Used F Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk D Intermal Hard Disk Drive fol GE se Local Disk Primary NTFS 4996 GE 3 GB Local Disk Ls Primary NTFS 250 3GB 72 5 MB Archive Details Ha
19. in which two partitions have been chosen is important since all contents of the second selected partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition The program provides the ability to merge only NTFS FAT16 or FAT32 partitions Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Merge Partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 78 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to merge Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to merge as the right one will be selected automatically During the operation all contents of the right partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition By default the program offers an easy to understand folder name which can be customized however Please note that itis possible to select only FAT FAT S2 of NTFS adjacent partitions or FAT FATS of NTFS partitions separated from each other by free block You will not be able to proceed further if no pair of partitions of these types are presented on the disk Select left partition from a pair you would like to merge Aight partition will be selected automatically Please note that content of right partition will be placed within a folder placed in a root of left par
20. the information is structurally divided besides there is the possibility to see the disk layout before and after an operation what is very convenient In order to view logs on carried out operations click Tool Button then select View Log Files Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Aa amp BR Sessions Session operations Session event Show Source launcher exe Operation parameters Started 10 24 2013 at 7 06 32 AM Ze Applying at 7 30 34 AM 108 b Mount Unmount partition virtual succeeded Start time O7 14 31 Type of operation Wirtual Result Succeeded Show Source Operation parameters Create partition committed succeeded Total 6 operations 3 virtual and 3 committed Warning This session did not finished corectly Most probably the program was abnormally terminated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl E S i Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E a 3 j Unallocated NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl g Unallocated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl E S E Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E 5 E New Volume E NTFS NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl g Unallocated T
21. 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 39 Vista Since Windows Vista operating systems do not use the archaic CHS cylinder head sector addressing scheme but the Logical Block Addressing LBA where sectors are addressed continuously over the whole disk drive It is optimal for both 512B and new 4K disk drivers Inheritance Select the option to disable automatic alignment of partitions e Check FS integrity policy Accomplishment of any data sensitive operation resize move merge redistribute change cluster size etc is potential with data loss To minimize this risk it s recommended to check integrity of your file system before this type of operations despite the fact that it s quite time consuming We offer you several options to let you choose which is best for you Always Maximum protection but minimal performance The file system integrity will be checked each time it s necessary to guarantee the maximum protection for the on disk data Once Standard protection with acceptable performance The file system integrity will be checked for each volume only once just before accomplishing data sensitive operations Never No protection but maximum performance If you re not 100 sure your disk is rock solid please do not use this option e Data Loss Protection mode To guarantee safety for your information when a data sensitive operation has been abruptly interrupted as a result of a computer rese
22. 3 3 GE NTFS To avoid any possible problems the new partition will in no way be created as the first partition of the disk which already contains at least one partition And its size If there are blocks of the free space on the disk the wizard will merge them all and allocate the resulted space for a new partition in the first place If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider fou can select either a block of unallocated space of the disk or an existing partition unused space of which will be served to create a new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Local Disk a Unallocated 4 3GB NTFS 3 6 GB New volume current size is 3 9 GB Min Volume Size 0 Bytes _ 1 Max Volume Size 7 9 GB In case the second option has been marked the wizard enables to choose an existing primary partition to install a new operating system On this page vou can choose an existing primary partition where you Would like to install a new operating system Please make sure your BIOS tt set up to Boot from the disk containing the selected partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Local Disk BB 253 4 GB NTFS b Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware iTotal size 353 4 GB Used 108 7 ME E o Hew Yol a o Local lf ee 153 3 GB 7 o Hew Yo 27r GB NTFS 46G
23. 8 36 30 AM 5 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 132 Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask i specited all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and wall not get Into the archive Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category Chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter ls Delete filter xlsx Delete filter wn Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx Delete filter Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Filter Browse Description G You can use wildcards and to specify the mask cred e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox
24. Archive I 48MB ke 3 G 107 1072013 2 17 45 AM New Volume G 14 2 GB 3KE 3 G amp 107 1072013 2 1719 AM New Volume G 14 2 GB ee MB 2 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source Ea MX g images C U ers AdministratorsD esktop images Hame T Er JPET Y OTAN IE EOT AT I di Users 2 2 di Administrator 2 2 2 i di App ata 2 2 2 di Application Data oo di Contacts di Cookies di Desktop El Total data size 15 9 MB 3 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to sawe the data f Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD 4 On the Select Destination Path page specify the exact place to copy the data to Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 172 Please select the destination path where to sawe the data from clipboard Lookin E Local Disk ic il 9 F Address amp Marne SF Local Disk C J arc_09101 3125156058 J are_091013131559760 J arc_091013133756622 J arc_091013140817551 arc 091013140825801 Total data size 15 9 HB Space available on destination 219 6 GB 5 On the Transfer Summary page check a
25. Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location E arc_test me 8 F Name size Date Ef My Computer a E Local Disk C New Yolume E F NEW VOLUME F J H RecovenMedia G l E Network Archive details Archive name Jarc _tesi Estimated archive size 2 HB Space available on backup destination 92 4 GB The program automatically calculates size of the future archive and informs the user about space available on the selected destination e Archive Comment You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No comment Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected object This image is placed into the specified destination its features defined by the wizard Available operation scenarios e Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule e Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD e Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive e Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server e Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive e Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition e Creating a differential to a full partition backup e Creating a file increment to a full partition backup e Creating an increm
26. CDR10 Vendor NECVMWar Quick media erasing it may take about a minute Session opening Data burning 11 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 12 Turn off the computer ate This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition The system fails to boot since some files are damaged If you have a backup of the system partition you can recopy these files to make the system be operable again 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 167 option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has s
27. Curehrvalues Registry volume letter C Partition ID 1 Microsoft Windows 8 x64 Destination Disk 2 Partition 3 Status Bootable Curent values Registry volume letter C Partition ID 1 6 Confirm the operation 7 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 8 Restart the computer Correcting BCD Boot Configuration Data To automatically correct Windows BCD please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch Boot Corrector 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct boot parameters to let the wizard fix BCD in all found Windows installations Corect the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and comect MBR executable code on some of them Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice Corect boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically corect boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system Corect EFI boot parameters Fix EFI boot entry or switch EFI boot entry to another GPT bootable hard drive with Windows O5 installed 5 Confirm the operation 6 Click the Finish button to clo
28. GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated n l he 6 On the Select Target Hard Disk page select a destination disk a hard disk to copy contents of the source disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 200 Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i pe Unallocated 334 6 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Unallocated 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev a 119 9 GB 1 During the operation all contents of the destination disk will be deleted On the next page of the wizard define the copy options In our case we d rather copy data with a proportional resize to occupy the entire disk If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options Partitions raw copy Resize options W Remove free blocks between partitions W Copy data and re
29. Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk C E O New p Ne 280 3 GE NTFS 117 3 GB TONNE Co Capacity of the volume Cz it 280 3 GB The wizard can expand this volume up to 499 6 GB at the expence of other volumes 4 Select a volume to take the space from i e the logical one Select volumes to take space from Free space from that volume will be used to enlarge the volume pou have selected on the previous page 2 Free Type Capacity Used pace Free space NTFS Friman 280 3 GB 60 6 GE 219 6 GB FAT Se 101 9 GE 0 Bytes 101 9 GE Yolume File system 100 Logical 5 On the next page of the wizard you can specify size of the resulted system volume Drag the slider or type in the exact value to set the volume size Your disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk C New Volume 6 241 8 GE NTFS BB cents Select new size 264 553 MB 222 367 MB 449 061 54 MB Ca Current volume size 258 3 GB The volume size has been increased on 41 1 GB 6 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Separating OS from media data Let s assume you ve got one partition available on th
30. Hard Disk Drive S00 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes fae GiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive r50 GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes ke Master Boot Record MER 0 T 4 d The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to local network drives option There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive C Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 116 6 Map a network disk to place your backup image to Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location C 44 SAO OT lil N F Mame Size Date Samj My Computer R
31. Help Copy Hard Disk One Button Copy Wizard d Disk O Vii Backup Wizard h Restore Wizard dDiski vMy Simple Backup Restore Backup to VD Wizard Incremental Backup to YD Wizard Restore from VD Wizard d Disk 2 WMy Undelete Partitions Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard Split Partition Wizard d Disk 3 W Disko File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Password Cleaner e Type ree Volume lak rd Disk O Siz Registry editor Primary Network Configurator 33 1 MBE System Ri Primary nstall Windows OS utility 39GB No label 6 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to back up page select your Mac hard disk Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 123 Basic Hard Disk O Model YMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Used Free Volumelabel Active Hidden Basic Hard Disk 0 Size 500 GB h 0 Primary NTFS 350 MB 257 MB 93 1 MBE System Resen Yes Yes Primary NTFS 500 GB 60 5 GE 439 GB No label No No 8 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to any local drive or a network share option Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted
32. In case there is some previous version of the program installed on the computer the program will offer the user to uninstall it first Click on the supplied setup file to initiate the installation First your system will be checked for the presence of Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library and if not found you will be prompted to install it comes with the installation package Click Install to continue Status Requirement Pending Visual C 10 0 Runtime 66 10 0 30319 1 The Welcome page will inform that the application is being installed Click Next to continue Please Read Paragon License Agreement carefully and then select the appropriate option to accept Otherwise you won t be able to proceed with the installation By clicking the Print button the license agreement may also be printed out Provide your product key and serial number On the Customer Information page you are to provide the standard customer information i e a user name and an organization Besides you need to decide whether to make the program available for all users of this computer if several or only for the current one On the next page click Change to install the utility to a different location by default C Program Files Paragon Software Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Suite Edition Otherwise click Next to continue Do not install the program on network drives Do not use Terminal Server sessions to install and run the program In both cases th
33. Modified w Drives SE Hard Disks EG 1 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Device 500 GB I E 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GE Et e Primary NTFS E 72 6 GB B E arc_disk3 H E arc doc H E arc Image agm arc_svstem HE inc 171013045750652 s o arc_ sister pbt Ay MB gt arc_ system phi 576 KB Lj anc_ system ptm 2 KB h E System Volume Information 1 2 Primary FAT 32 F 20 9 GB 1 13 Primary Ext2 Et3 Extd Reiser 13GB l 4 Primary Ext2 E xt3 Ext4 Reiser 19 2 GB H 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device fol GE GE 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GE AR virtual Drives 3 Calla context menu right click of the mouse button for a file folder you need and then select the Export item 10716 2013 9 02 11 PM 10716 2013 9 00 23 PM 10716 2013 9 00 56 PM 10716 2013 8 57 56 PM 10716 2013 8 57 56 PM 10716 2013 8 57 20 PM 10716 2013 9 59 15 PM 10716 2013 8 57 19 PM 10716 2013 8 23 03 PM Name Size Modified AR Drives Samj Hard Disks i 1 YMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB GH GBP Primary NTFS 350 MB 2 Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB ni H E Recycle Bin 9 3 2013 1 49 11 PM lf iC Jocuments and settings ifs PerfLogs E Program Files Refresh E Program Files x86 ProgramData i E System Volume Information i E Users E Windows 4 Selecta place on the disk where the file folder Look in E Local Disk C i
34. Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here i www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer 4 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to work with USB devices i By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 5 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 156 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to Restore page click the standard browse button to find the required archive When done double click on it to select Look in 9 arc_101013062156703 hiw arc_091013131559760 pbt File name arc_091013131559760 pbf File type Archive files pbf Y Cancel Help F1 Mazi gt 8 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview ma BOSOS O Volume Type File System Sze Used Volumelabel Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164 MB New Volume Primary NTFS 8 4 GB 8 5 MB New Volume w w Archive detail
35. Partitions There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the undelete partition operation e Free blocks to scan for lost partitions Choose a free block from a tree like list of available hard disks Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or free Glock you want to esamine Name Type ER My Computer My Computer F ta B Basic MBA Hard Disk 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCSI Disk Dey Internal Hard D i Unallocated Free space The summary size of fragmentis to analyze is 7 9 GB e Search method By default the wizard selects the fastest search method for your operating system In most cases that will do to find any accidentally deleted partition However if you re under Windows XP for instance Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 82 the Conventional Search option is selected but the deleted partition you re looking for has been created with the Disk Management utility under Vista the wizard won t be able to find this partition unless you manually select the appropriate option Quick Search for Partitions Created by Vista or Later OS Moreover if the wizard still fails to find the partition you need you can select the Thorough Search option to scan every single sector in the specified search area to get the most accurate results Choose how
36. Settings All the settings are grouped into several sections which functions are described in the following paragraphs The list of sections is placed on the left side of the dialog By selecting a section from the list you can open a set of options Oo To get a detailed description to any setting control or field of the program just click the hint button and then the object you need General Options 4 General options Partition Alignment Mode Vista Align partitions according to the rules used in Windows Vista and later OSes Check FS integrity policy Once Standard protection from data loss with acceptable performance The file system integrity will be checked for each volume only once just before accomplishing data sensitive operations Data Loss Protection mode Reset Medium protection from data loss This section contains a set of general options that will be taken into account during any operation carried out with the program e Partition Alignment mode There are three options you can choose from Legacy DOS and Windows OSes before Vista required that partitions had to be aligned to the disk cylinder or 63 sectors to address and access sectors correctly It was OK until 4K hard drives came into scene When partitions are aligned this way on this type of disk each logical cluster is linked to two physical 4K clusters thus resulting in a double read write operation Copyright 1994
37. Start when ready f g Network utilities Ltility Ping Target www google com D Ping the specified host until stopped Clear output Resolve addresses to hostnames Number of echo requests to send Running ping www google com Pinging www google com 1 73 194 71 103 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 21ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 717 103 bytes 32 time 20ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 717 103 bytes 32 time 18ms TTL 128 Reply from 1 3 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 24ms TTL 128 Ping statistics for 173 1594 71 103 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 18ms Maximum 24ms Average 20ms ping www google com done e Ping the specified host until stopped Mark the option to ping the chosen host for indefinite time e Resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display hostnames instead of IP addresses e Number of echo requests to send By default the utility sends 4 echo requests which you can modify however Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 217 2 If you need to trace a route to some network host please select Trace route then type in the required IP address or its name Click Start when ready Utility Ping Target Enter IF ac Ping the specified host until stopped Resolve addresses to hostnames CET aie N
38. a network share please do the following Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 215 1 Click Configure Network 2 Inthe opened dialog provide an IP address a network mask default gateway etc for your network device Ethemet adapter Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection IP address configuration a Obtain an IP address automaticaly Renew address Release address f Use the following IP address IP Address 192 168 40 170 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Default Gateway 192 158 40 F Advanced DNSANINS enti garretts AAPtM ApNM APta apmM aAp j Aa W Obtain DNS server address automaticaly DNS server 197 166 40 2 Advanced W Obtain WINS server address automaticaly Primary WINS server 197 168 40 2 Secondary WINS server fo Oo 0 0 Load from file Save to file Apply Cancel 3 Click the Network drivers tab to map a network share Newer arves Aeaeeia A e Drive Networcpath i O aen bana ae Disconnect Drive 4 Click Map Network Drive and provide all the necessary information to map a network share in the opened dialog Remote location mapping A network share ei Map to drive letter z Make permanent connection x Connect as user Cancel e Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it e Define a letter from the pull down list of available driv
39. as no system or users data will be affected during the installation process f want to use an existing primary partition to install 05 ln case creation of a new primary partition i not possible there are already four primary partitions on the disk or not desirable you are free to select any of existing primary partitions Please note that all data on the selected partition will be deleted if you choose to format it later in this wizard Besides make sure no operating system has already been installed on that partition Oo Only primary partitions can be used to install an operating system In case the first option has been marked the wizard enables to specify A hard disk if several where a new partition will be created Thanks to an advanced program engine it is possible to use unallocated space of the disk if any and unused space of existing partitions to create a new partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 84 On this page vou can choose a hard disk if several where you would like to create a new primary partition Please make sure your BIOS i set up to boot from the selected disk Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i A p Local Disk Ts p Unallocated CASGENTES Total size 4 3 GB Used 47 1 MB Basic HER Hard Disk 2 Y Free 4 3 GB tual SCSI Disk Dev i im L M 7 Local Disk G 7 E New Volume H 1 5 GE 3 1 GE NTFS
40. at least one entry for every file on an NTFS volume including the MFT itself MFT is similar to a FAT table ina FAT file system MBR amp 1st track of the hard disk is the Oth sector of the disk MBR Master Boot Record contains important information about the disk layout The used partitioning scheme The starting records of the Partition Table The standard bootstrap code or the initial code of boot managers disk overlay software or boot viruses Generally the Oth sector is used for similar purposes in all existing partitioning schemes The MBR capacity is not sufficient to contain sophisticated boot programs That s why the on boot software is allowed to use the entire Oth track of the disk For example boot managing utilities such as LILO GRUB and Paragon Boot Manager are located in the Oth track Partition ID or File system ID is a file system identifier that is placed in the partition It is used to quickly detect partitions of supported types A number of operating systems completely rely on it to distinguish supported partitions Partition ID is saved in appropriate entries of the Partition Table and takes only 1 byte of space Partition Label or Volume Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector This value is used for notification purposes only It is detectable by any partitioning tool including the DOS FDISK utility Modern operating systems save it withi
41. backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept e GUID Partition Table GPT It is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR GPT disks are now supported by Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Mac OS X and Linux Supported Virtualization Software Supported virtual hard drive types e VMware Virtual Machine Disk Format VMDK e Microsoft Virtual Hard Disk VHD Supported virtual machines for P2V scenarios e Microsoft Virtual PC e VMware Workstation e VMware Fusion Supported File Systems e Full read write access to FAT16 FAT32 partitions e Full read write access to NTFS Basic Disks under Windows Linux and PTS DOS Compressed NTFS files are also supported e Full read write access to Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS partitions e Limited read write access to Apple HFS partitions Oo Unfortunately support of non Roman characters for the HFS file system is unavailable at the moment The company is about to implement it in the nearest future Supported Media e Support of both MBR and GPT hard disks 2 2TB disks included e IDE SCSI and SATA hard disks Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 14 e SSD Solid State Drive e AFD Advanced Format Drive e Non 512B sector size drives e CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R double layer and also Blu ray discs e FireWire i e IEEE1394 USB 1 0 USB 2
42. chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 74 Dialog Startup 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Format Partition i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to format Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to format On this page you can choose a volume you would like to format Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l g o Local Disk C B o data Z 256 1 GE NTFS 243 5 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l H Unallocated 115 5 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr E o Local Disk 749 9 GB NTFS M 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set the following partition parameters Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i 2f49GB NTFS Partition type Volume label New Volume Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the
43. converting FAT16 to FAT32 There are a number of situations when this kind of conversion is the only way out to accomplish the operation For instance you are going to migrate your system to a larger hard disk with the proportional resize of existing partitions what is very convenient As a result you can get original FAT16 partitions go beyond the 4GB limit Thus without conversion to FAT32 this operation will in no way be possible to accomplish The same goes for any copy hard disk partition or restore hard disk partition operation involving an extra upsizing Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 44 E Mail Options pA E mail options Specify your e mail account options Outgoing mail server SMTP User e mail address SMTP port number 0 Mp outgoing server requires authentication Pa zawod e Click this button to test e mail account options The program will send generated e mail message to the address you ve specitied in User e mail address field This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during the Send log files and Send e mail notification operations e Outgoing mail server SMTP To send messages by using the built in mail client it is necessary to have access to a computer running an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server All outgoing messages are first sent to the SMTP server which in its turn delivers them to the required recipients The address may be r
44. di arc 101013091536750 107 1072013 2 15 43 AM di arc 101013091 716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM m arc 101013140759053 107 1072013 7 22 40 AM di arc 101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 12 58 AM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 499 6 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 489 1 GB File C arc 0910131251560587 arc_0910131 25156058 pbf aly To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Backup Capsule 215 3 GB All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 5 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH A
45. dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 49 Log Files Options i Log files options Logs directory Browse Please select a folder name to place an engine log files stubact log etc White logs in Bluescreen Choose this option to allow engine operations logging when actions need to be restarted and continued in Bluescreen mode Stubact log file truncation Choose a storage lite span for the stubact log file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be ernptied f Infinite f Minimal f Custom 1 hours Clean now In this section you can set up the program logging engine e Logs directory to specify location of program log files By default all logs are placed to C Program Files Paragon Software product s name program e Write logs in Bluescreen to enable the program logging in a special boot up mode e Stu
46. don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time es 4 Now you ve gota block of free space to add to the system partition You cannot do it directly however but by carrying out a number of extra move resize operations Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Se Local D lL Data E i Unallo 41 2GB 244 1 GEN Mill 641GB Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated 499 9 GB Hew Vol 170 2 GE L 5 Since the block of free space is within the extended partition you need to take it out first The program enables to resize the extended partition only when there s a block of free space adjoining its borders In our case it s between two logical disks So we need to move it To do that please select the first logical partition and then call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local D Data E Gl Unallo Hew Yol 21 2 G6 24d L Back Up Partition 5 Burn Partition on CO DWD or BD Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Restore Partition Unallocated 499 9 GE Format Partition Delete Partitions Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mae Partition Unallocated gt Defragrnertt MFT 749 9 GB Compact MFT
47. each sector byte 7 Peter Gutmann s algorithm A whopping 35 passes with 27 random order passes using specific patterns combined with eight passes using random patterns 8 Bruce Schneier s algorithm Two passes of specific patterns followed by five passes using a cryptographically secure pseudo random sequence 9 Paragon s algorithm e Overwrite each sector with a forcefully randomized 512 byte string new for each sector using CSPRNG cryptographically secure pseudo random number generator Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 32 e Overwrite each erased sector with its complement e Overwrite each sector with a 512 byte string CSPRNG again forcefully randomized and different from the first pass and new for each sector e Fill each erased sector with OxAA value Finally the target data area is to be verified Military and government standards always require 100 percent residual data verification It is necessary to make sure that the operation has been properly accomplished Besides corrupted sectors discovered during the operation are to be logged to keep the user informed since these sectors may contain classified information The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product Anyway you ve always got the possibility to create a customized algorithm defining up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns
48. enter a path to it Definea letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Enter network credentials Enter your credentials to connect to server2 quest Domain WeSs0WENTOIENM Remember my credentials W Access is denied Cancel e Click OK when ready Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 119 6 Edit the default archive name and description in the Archive details section if necessary Click Next to proceed Image details Backup name Backup_HDDO_201 310295_0713 Backup description Backup_image_20131029_0713 7 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later What would you like to da Generate script Create a script to back up the specitted objects later 8 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server With our program you can protect the entire system separate partitions or particular files by backing up directly to online storages located on FTP or SFTP serv
49. has nearly the same functionality as for the Normal mode except for the Network Configurator and Log Saver commands Besides due to certain limitations of the PTS DOS environment there is no possibility to burn CD DVD discs Low Graphics Safe Mode When the Low Graphics mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has the same functionality and looks similar to the Safe mode but graphically simpler Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 20 Hard Disk Manager 14 You can create delete and Simple Restore Wizard format hard disk partitions Ba File Transfer Wizard using this program which I Boot Corrector will start now _ Upon the start please W Start the command line select the drive and one of S Reboot the computer its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Booting from the WinPE Recovery Media The WinPE recovery environment can be a real alternative to the Linux DOS recovery environment Providing nearly the same level of functionality it offers an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version does Startup To start working with the WinPE recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can i get here www paragon s
50. have a mounted 300 MB NTFS partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 28 pVHD Support Paragon introduces a pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive format a special VHD optimized for storing backups of virtual and physical machines It s very efficient in handling incremental chains data de duplication and synchronization pVHD allows obtaining backups that are up to four times smaller than original backup objects In the current version of the product backup images can be made either in the old PBF or the new pVHD Please note that the pVHD support has a promotional goal In future releases pVHD will gradually take the primary role Below is the list of wizards that allow working with pVHD e Backup to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Restore from VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE What you get by using pVHD e Incremental imaging works much faster and rock stable in comparison with the old PBF e Only pVHD images can be used to do immediate virtualization e With the new backup technology available for customers as a new backup image format pVHD Paragon has also achieved easy support of any virtual containers VMDK VHD etc GPT versus MBR GUID Partition Table GPT is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR Being a part of the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI standard proposed by Intel to replace the outdated PC BIOS it offers a nu
51. i It g Copy partition iiia 18Gb 12Gb 5 4 Mb 37 0 Gb Format Linhide Delet Wipe partition Clear iee space Convert Set label Resize Move el labe UWinaurt Change cluster sire 6 You will be notified after the operations are completed 7 Restart the computer System Migration Scenarios Migrating Windows OS to a solid state drive Migrate OS to SSD The latest SSDs do not boast high capacity but rather smaller size and faster processing speeds over regular hard drives Plus they are completely indifferent to mechanical impact a feature crucial for mobile computers These benefits are leading more and more users to consider migrating at least OS to SSDs to get the most out of their systems So how do you migrate a Windows OS and hundreds of gigabytes of data on one huge volume to an SSD drive of 80 128GB Our Migrate OS to SSD Wizard can help you do that with minimal effort To migrate any Windows OS since XP from a regular hard disk to a fast SSD please do the following Connect an SSD drive to the computer Turn on the computer Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Migrate OS E e N IS The first page of the wizard informs the user on the upcoming operation Please read all notes carefully before you proceed To get additional information on the subject click the Learn more about migrating OS link at the bottom of the window highly recommended Once you
52. immediately after confirmation Test Surface The program enables to test surface of existing partitions and blocks of free space for bad or unstable sectors If found any it automatically marks them unusable in the file system metadata thus minimizing the risk of data loss In order to start the surface test you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition or a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Test Surface There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 From the pull down list choose the level of the surface check Gi Test surface of volume C h Testing volume surtace allows to find bad blocks and other problems Please select a surface test level Pe mime lt i e 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check File System Integrity The program allows you to check integrity of a file system It can be used to detect possible file system errors before performing any operation on a partition To start the system integrity check you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Check File System Integrity There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter
53. independence To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the Hide Partition dialog Click the Yes button to continue r Are you sure you want to hide the partition You are about to hide partion E No label NTFS Hiding the patton may cause drive letters to be changed Oo Hiding of the system partition will make OS non bootable what is quite normal 9 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 10 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree After all the operations are completed you will not be able to restart the system what is quite normal Nevertheless if you do try it the following error will occur STOP 5 ror i 12 initia Ton pr s or system process terminated unexpectedly with a sta tus of i 34 OMOOLOOSTC All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 11 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attenti
54. it 2 Release some free space not less than 10 GB to install Windows XP from the partition To do that please call a context menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and launch the Move Resize dialog Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 0 You se about to oesie a new partition in Unallocated 341 2 GB ares Please select size postion and file srstem of the new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev ij New Volume F 241 2 GE NTFS Create new partition as Primary partition Please soecty new pariiion sine 2459451 7 MB 349 451 MB Please soecty size of free space before the partition 0 al OMB 349 437 MB Please soecty size of free space after tha partion U al DME 369 403 ME Please select fle system for new partition NTFS Pigs enter new volume lebel Mew Volume Please specty dive letter F Ei ee 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the left by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 192 Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to move resize NTFS volume No label E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev il Q Un
55. just enough to easily roll it back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore ale There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 153 Show all amp Ee Ek 107 1072013 7 18 58 AM File level Archive 0 Bytes 11 1071072013 2 18 24 AM Filelevel Archive 13 KB eat 107 1072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 120 GB 4 107 1072013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev 120 GB 5 J 1071072013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 71 93 MB J 10 10 2013 6 55 43 4M Filelevel Archive 24 KB 3g J 10 10 2013 6 54 26 4AM Filelevel Archive 71 9 MB J 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM Filelevel Archive 71 9 MB G amp 1071072013 21 49 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE G 1071072013 21719 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE 2 T 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GB 2 J 107972013 11 22 19 PM Filelevel Archive 24 KB 38 J 1
56. left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 7 Local Disk C i New Volume E 250 3 GE NTFS 219 3 GE NTFS If you ve got more than two partitions on your hard disk and a partition you need to Oo increase is surrounded by other partitions you ve got the choice to choose which partition will act as a space donor Just click on the left partition of the pair as the right one will be selected automatically 4 Increase size of the system partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis a Hew Yolume F E 422 9 GB NTFS Lett volume size Right volume size eg46 MB ME k 5M A MB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 176 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be aske
57. modify the previously set parameters of the startup process f Configure Choose this option to enter Settings page ou will be able to configure Booth anager appearances and Boot Menu options f Deactivate Choose this option to deactivate Boothanager This will remove Booth anager and restore boot process to its previous state Result After the Boot Manager Setup Wizard is completed the program updates the original record in the MBR to get control of the booting process and to be able to display the boot menu Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Partition Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry out partitioning operations supported by the program Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 69 Basic Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish basic partitioning operations create format delete Creating Partitions The program provides the ability to create a new partition within a block of un partitioned space Restrictions 1 Do not use the Create Partition function in order to undelete the last deleted partition 2 The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free Space on an existing partition to a new partition 3 The program cannot create new partitions on Dynamic Disks Express Create Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on
58. operations inii O Your disk after operations i tT 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 145 Operations list a Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 376 4 MB Read so far 430 0 MB 86 0 MB s To copy 10 2GB Write so far 430 0 MB 47 8 MBIs Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 12 Time to finish 00 06 28 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 1 from file arc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Data writing 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer i To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a network drive Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on a remote backup server That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a network drive please do the following For PBF images 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can Oo get here www paragon software com my ac
59. or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size LJ E My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 g SiMaster Boot Record MBA 0 Bytes BA Primary NTFS 350MB 2 e I Local Disk C Primary NTFS 200 3GB g Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 E SiMaster Boot Record MBA 0 Bytes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 499 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary Linux Ext 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive 750 GB f First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes 4 Master Boot Record MBER OU Butes z The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate D checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 On the Backup Destination page select the Burn the data to CD or DVD option There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule C Sa
60. program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 75 In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page When it is marked the next page enables to define Ww Use 0S built in format routine Please select sectors per cluster e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Oo Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Format button to confirm the operation Are you sure you want to format volume F17 Tou are about to format volume F New Yolume NTFS our computer may na longer boot or work correctly Pl
61. record to from the MBR e Auto Boot option to automatically start up the previously chosen OS after a certain time period Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 68 e Hiding of any primary partition except selected at the moment Startup e Click Tool Button then select Setup Boot Manager There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Boot menu options In this section you can switch between the following modes Normal mode Choose this mode to display the boot menu every time the computer starts up and define a timeout on the expiry of which the program will automatically select the previously chosen item of the menu Hidden mode Choose this mode not to display the boot menu until pressing a hot key For this mode you should define a hot key used to enable the Boot Manager and a time period in seconds the startup message will be displayed Boot menu options Normal mode W Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds C Hidden mode Choose a hot key for startup Booth anager e Deactivating Configuring the Boot Manager These two options will only be available once the wizard has been completed and launched again Select the Deactivate option to remove the Boot Manager from the MBR Master Boot Record or Configure to
62. rights reserved 175 5 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see the newly created NTFS partition Now you ve got a place to keep your stuff apart from Windows Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Click on your system partition By doing that the wizard will automatically select an adjacent partition as well This partition will later act as a space donor The wizard will resize space between Local Disk C and New Yolume E on Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual SCSI Disk Dev Select
63. sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions not to keep blocks of free space between partitions on the targeted hard disk Copy data and resize partitions proportionally to make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when upgrading the hard disk to a larger one After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make Windows bootable
64. server in the passive mode only Parallel access to several FTP SFTP servers is limited only one password for all servers is available Adaptive Restore Technology Background Windows family operating systems are notorious for their excessive sensibility to hardware especially when it turns to replacement of such a crucial device as HDD controller or motherboard actually Windows will most likely fail to boot as a result of this operation In 2008 our company came with an exclusive technology called Paragon Adaptive Restore Initially aimed at restore of Windows Vista or Server 2008 from a backup to a different hardware configuration its current realization available in the P2P Adjust OS Wizard enables to make any Windows OS since XP bootable on dissimilar hardware by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for this type of migration Technology Concept Let s take a closer look at how Paragon Adaptive Restore works Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 25 Source environment ee i lt Adjusting HAL Modifying a lt Adjusting kernel gt i a intemal setings m wen p a m a M a a rivers for PS 2 Modifying additional _ Resetting cr a Devices 7 settings parameters i ae Sy we al a Injecting drivers for boot critical devices and Nits Fram the Windows Repository From additional driver repositories Destination
65. so you can for instance download and inject drivers for the BusLogic controller from the VMware website e Additional properties that depending on the selected virtualization vendor may include Size of the virtual disk By default the wizard offers to create a virtual disk exactly the size of the selected object s which you can resize however available for all Resize partitions proportionally If you upsize the resulted virtual disk you can make the wizard proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact available for all Create a split disk You can choose whether to automatically cut the resulted virtual image to files of 2 GBs or not available for VMware only Pre allocate all disk space You can choose whether to pre allocate all space of the future virtual disk or do it dynamically not available for VMware ESX and Oracle VirtualBox Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 211 Please preview the resulting layout of the virtual disk before you proceed Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware virtual image Virtual Image Local Disk SCSI LSI Logic Z Create a split disk T Pre allocate all disk space Current size is 40967 MB 17 8GB l l iii V Resize partitions proportionally Oo The maximum limit you can downsize the virtual disk is the capacity of its first partition 7 Specify a file name for the virtual machine and its location By de
66. software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch Boot Corrector 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct EFI parameters to specify the required bootable device in the EFI boot entry F Windows installation to correct View the list of all windows installations and corect boot parameters Corect the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and comect MBR executable code on some of them Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice 4 Corect boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically corect boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system Pi Corect EFI boot parameters B a p e Oo The option above will be available for the user only if the operation is accomplished through the 64 bit WinPE media Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 136 5 The wizard will detect and list all available GPT partitions that accommodate 64 bit Windows OS Choose the one you need to boot from to let the wizard modify the EFI boot entry correspondingly The wizard has searched your computer for valid Windows installations You can see results of the operation below Note The status System stays for a system partition Bootable for a boot partition
67. the Ribbon Panel then select Express Create There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Create Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup 1 Select a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Express Create Partition Wizard Setup Thanks to a highly intelligent work algorithm the wizard requires minimal involvement in the operation thus you only need to choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition if several available which actually differ in the amount of space to allocate For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 70 The result you will get after applying the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l li Local Disk C eri oO GE NTFS Please select the method of new partition creation f Smart Mode Use 109 3 GB to crea
68. the task after 1071372013 Speci User name and password Discard all operations on close 4 Inthe opened dialog enter the required task name and specify the task timetable 5 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Oo This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations Extra Functionality This chapter describes the supplementary functionality available in the program View Partition Hard Disk Properties The program enables to obtain in depth information on the properties of hard disks and partitions Besides the general information such as capacity used space or file system type it provides the possibility to get info on hard disk geometry cluster size exact partition location etc To get properties on a partition hard disk please do the following 1 Choose a partition hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Properties Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 98 There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Type Frima Capacity 499 6 GB 636 501 813 248 Bytes 1 047 855 104 Sectors Used by data 12 6 GB 2 13 630 279 680 Bytes 26 621 640 Sectors Free space 486 9 GB 96 B22 01 533 068 Bytes 1 02
69. then select Delete Partition Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Delete Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to delete Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to delete On this page you can choose a volume vou would like to delete Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev F Local Disk C SS IG aS _ U Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey R Unallocated 115 8 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey g o Local Disk 749 9 GB NTFS M A Tou are about to destroy a partition All data on this partition will be lost Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 77 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Merge free blocks As a result of the operation you may get several blocks of the unallocated space
70. to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB ae ny Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Virtual 500 GB NTFS New Volume D NTFS New Volume Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic Hard Disk 0 M Model VMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type FileSystem Size Used Free Volumelabel Active Hidden Basic Hard Disk 0 Size 500 GB 0 Primary NTFS 350 MB 257 MB 93 1 MBE System Resen No Mo 1 E Primary NTFS 191 GE 60 9 GB 130 GB No label No No 2 Primary BackupCapsule 141 GB 7 8 GB 133 GB BC Yes Yes 3 Primary Free 168 GB No No You can also make the program resize the on disk partitions proportionally if necessary by marking the appropriate checkbox Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 142 1 All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 Onthe Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk 0 Your disk before operations aon Tt Your disk after operations i Tt 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the pr
71. to choose a location you want to save the archive to _ Burn data to CD DVDIBD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 Select an external USB drive as a backup destination Look in NTFS 0 on Disk 1 UFSD disk 9 arc_091013125156058 3 Documents and Settings C PerLogs C Program Files C Program Files x86 3 ProgramData 9 System Volume Information 3 Users 3 Windows Rename FG New folder FT Delete F8 File name Img DO pbt Save File type Archive tiles pbf Cancel lt Back Next gt Cancel 10 Edit the archive name if necessary Backup destination Archive name HDD1 Parntoi Img_O_1 pbf Space available on destination 490 GB Approximate archive size 52 8 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 11 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 124 Archive text comment Please enter backup comments to describe the archive Archive Img_O_1 pbf created 2013 10 10 05 23 24 12 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process D This operation can also be
72. to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 105 Y Check volume C No label NTFS for errors Please note that check operation neede exclusive access to the volume You may be asked to restart your computer to complete the operation Check disk options Automatically fie file system errors 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check Archive Integrity The program provides the ability to check integrity of a backup image The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using them The Check Archive Integrity Wizard will help you do that Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Check Archive Integrity There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any E Show archives Show all B B Ei Ek Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Corr Mounted 10714 2013 2 20 44 SM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMivare Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev FOO GB 18 7 MB a Ho 1 G 10714 2013 2 20 15 Sh New Volu
73. to take free space from it Partition size By default the program leaves 50 of the unused space on a partition and removes another 50 to add it to the target partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider or by manually entering the exact value Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 81 Your disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i 137 5 GB NT Select new size 370 818 MB 230 114 ME 511 522 66 MB CE Curent volume size 362 1 GB The volume size has been increased on 137 4 GB Result After the operation is completed free space of the specified partition will be increased by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions Undeleting Partitions When simply deleting a partition without additional wiping disk management software only removes references to it in the Partition Table thus leaving the possibility to recover it later The program enables to find and recover these partitions A restored partition will be fully functional as long as other partitions were not created moved or exceeded the disk space occupied by that partition That is why the program offers this function only for blocks of free space The operation can be accomplished with the Undelete Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Undelete
74. type menu e Initiating the operation by an event One time only i e the Once item When the system starts i e the At System Startup item When the user logs on i e the At Logon item e Initiating the operation periodically i e Daily Weekly Monthly Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Daily Weekly Monthly Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 95 You need to select one of the variants Depending on your choice the scheduler displays a form that enables to set a timetable Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Wi k ly W Do not reboot if reboot is required J Sushtem shutdown atter backup Start the task or 10709203 4 at 12004M Eyer i week s orl W Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Do not run the task after 10 09 2013 Speci user name and password To run the task in the log off mode please specify administering login info by following the appropriate link in the left lower corner of the page The Shutdown System on Complete option enables to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the operation Managing Tasks All scheduled tasks are placed in a separate list which can be retrieved by clicking the Schedule tab on the Ribbon Panel Scheduled Tasks amp ak Ee ta Backup of Local Disk C ser 2310131329451
75. wizard can search for drivers on a local disk or a mapped network share In our case it s on a network share this is why we need to map it first Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers Add a folder to the drivers source list Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 204 F Floppy Disk Drive A E E Local Disk C A Map Network Drive j 2 Network Ple Remote location mapping gt server pool Driver Repository Map to drive letter i D P Make permanent connection Windows Security X Enter Network Password Enter your password to connect to server Test Domain 7 32 ENTERPRIZE E Remember my credentials E Access is denied 11 When done we can select it as target Address ZA F Floppy Disk Drive A H E Local Disk C H ECD Drive D H Local Disk E p Ges SSPE Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers SF ey at The wizard enables to specify several driver repositories 12 If the wizard has found all missing drivers it will ask you to confirm the operation Apply the changes to complete After the operation is completed the system will be bootable on the new hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers at this st
76. 0 USB 3 0 hard disks e PC card storage devices MBR and GPT flash memory etc Getting Started In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to get the product ready to use System Requirements For the Windows installation package e Windows XP SP3 e Windows Vista e Windows 7 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Additional requirements e To install and run the product the target OS should have Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library installed comes with the installation package you will be prompted to install it if it s not been found in the system Oo During the installation additional free space up to 1GB will be required For the Linux bootable environment e Intel Pentium CPU or its equivalent with 300 MHz processor clock speed e 256 MB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse For the WinPE bootable environment e Intel Pentium III CPU or its equivalent with 1000 MHz processor clock speed e Atleast 1 GB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse Additional requirements Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 15 Network card to send retrieve data to from a network computer Recordable CD DVD drive to burn data to compact discs External USB hard drive to store data Installation Before the installation please make sure the systems requirements are met If everything is OK please do the following to install the product 1 8
77. 0 GB If you re going to save the backup image on a network share or a physical partition a partition that doesn t have a drive letter in the system click on the Browse button In the opened dialog you can see several options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 118 Look ir F Local Disk C mn amp g Address C UsersAdministrator Desktop Disk Drives pene Hele SST eo a archive_db Hi4 201 3 U1 1b aM gt oF PerfLogs 8 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Program Files 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM Partitions i Program Files 86 9 3 2013 2 54 48 PM Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM ER Administrator 10 29 2013 6 36 23 AM GE kchmviewer 10 23 2013 7 12 13 AM Contacts 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM See Desktop 10 29 2013 6 45 32 AM Documents 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Downloads 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Favorites 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM oi in DNI TAD AT Dhd Select Disk Drives to use a local disk as backup destination Select Partitions to use a physical partition as backup destination Click on the Map Network Drive icon to map a network share to use it as backup destination our case 5 To mapa network share please do the following Remote location mapping A network share eerverc pool h etvwork Storage el Map to drive letter Y Make permanent connection Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually
78. 072013 6 48 07 AM File level Archive 1071072013 21 49 AM New Volume G 1071072013 214819 4M New Volume G 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 4 10 9 2013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 107972013 11 17 38 PM Filelevel Archive i ALa La La L L La L f E C LAS Switch to File View Archive File Details Total size OU Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 7 18 58 4M Archive size 119 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File Carce 10101314 850711 FLOQOQ000000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 59 Lookin E LocalDisk C 0 A MH Mame Size Date p arc 091013125156058 10797 2013 11 17 27 PM di arc 091013131559760 10797 2013 10 37 14 PM di arc _ 091013133756622 1079 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc 091013140817551 10710 2013 7 00 26 4M di arc 091013140825801 10710 2013 7 00 44 4M di arc 101013053218496 10797 2013 10 32 29 PM di arc 101013061 434390 10797 2013 11 14 51 PM di
79. 07972013 11 17 38 PM Filelevel Archive 599 5 KB gt Switch to File view Archive File Details Hame Comment File File system Used pace 32GB Local Disk C No comment is available Volume label No label NTFS 477 7 GB Free space 445 6 GB Ce farc_ 10101 3062903344 arc_ 10101 3062503344 pbf Total size To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description i To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 154 Look in gt Local Disk C EX F Name Size Date S PP p Jac OST0TS125756069 ptt 5 1 GB 10 9 2073 6 00 28 4M arc 091013125156058 ph 28 9 MB 10 9 2013 6 00 23 4M fee larc 0910131251 56058 ptm 110 3 KE 10 9 2013 6 00 27 4M di arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM m arc 091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc 091013140817551 10 10 2013 7 17 43 AM m arc 091013140825801 107 1072013 7 18 23 AM di arc 10101 3053219496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM m arc_ 10101 3061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM di arc 10101 3062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM
80. 0825801 pbt Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe How to Restore File Complement page select whether you want to restore both the partition archive and the desired file increment or just the file increment In our case we choose the first option You have selected file complement to a volume arichive This archive can be restored together with the volume or you can only restore the files saved in the file archive f Restore only files A Note if you choose to restore archive together with a volume all data on the target volume wall be lost The contents of the volume Will be completely replaced from archive 5 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition Its content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Local Disk C i Unallocated 200 3 GE NTFS 219 3 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Local Disk F 499 6 GB NTFS 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the op
81. 1 233 464 Sectors In the opened dialog information will be grouped according to its properties thus by clicking tabs you can get information you need Volume Explorer Volume Explorer is a special tool to browse and export contents of the local mounted unmounted volumes formatted to FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS reFS file systems Besides it enables to access Paragon backups as regular folders to explorer their contents or to retrieve certain files Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel to open it Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 99 SAE i Drives oS AY E C CO De Ez POOL SE Hard Disks GEE 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 500 GB RT Primary NTFS 350 MB 2 Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB ngm Recycle Bin 9 3 2073 1 45 11 PM H E Documents and Settings of ee 6 45 52 oh wE PerfLogs Braer a 222355 AM E Frogram Files 10 22 2073 4 01 15 AFl H E Program Files 86 9 3 2073 1 54 48 PM os ee a 10 22 2013 7 00 32 AM E System Volume Information Export 10 22 2073 4 00 53 AM H Users Refresh 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM ee m 9 3 2073 9 43 00 4M bootmgr 417 6 KB 8 21 2013 9 31 45 PM s BOOT NT 1 Bytes 6 18 2013 4 18 29 AM B pagefile sys 1 1 G86 10 24 2013 3 37 45 AM awapfile sys 256 MB 10 22 2013 3 37 46 4M d E A 2 VMware YMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB a E 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 750 GB
82. 189 VVINGOWS XP WINOOWS VISTA eiea a E A A E E A 194 System Migration SCEN ANOS ciecie ETO E RN 196 Migrating Windows OS to a solid state drive Migrate OS to SSD ssssessssssssssrnsessrrrrsssrrrrressrtrressrrrreessrrrressrerreessereresseeeree 196 Migrating system to a new HDD Up tO 2 2TB iN SiZ rraioa E 199 Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS cccccccssseccccceeseececeeeeseccceeeeesecceeeeeeeceessaegeceessaenseeess 201 Virtualizing the Current system P2V COPY ein 2356 socicbesiacdosevad A E T aveetdaageenlacaewwaees 208 Hara DISK UCWIIZALION serrin nace aanvauseressebecennsesseusgunacta as E 211 Extra Scenarios t r WINPE score ceancescossrsceeescacscavesncavarsaanssvansaceewoceenencseess sewenssaneueenasuswaneaduasaneansousesanseecoestes tars 213 Adame SDC CIT IG CIN O cecgaatcntnGiorancdoiakcinaras n cobain Ga aaec tap AG eee aa eeeeoinat ets tiaaaa uo me harabsasakabbarensonssaisioonebeotseessic 213 CONTIBUFINE NEtWORK sistas ibe S N A ste tardies natouda ed nuideh beans at hosdarsaeesane 214 SVINE OE ES ees ta pecs paces tes aera tue sane oa ee ies a eon eater heat 217 TAFOUDICSNOOLE sariren aE SE E sans enianeesviuanmcenas tevecass 218 GI OSS ANY cris cetescaceacncsdaacanccaunenausciadecneseuaaeauacnuuesd venues aac sxuee sia veunacseecaanssansanacadsesuncoeveummeseaeseneses 220 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Introduction Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Suite is a
83. 1KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM netw840 inf 54KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM netw926 inf 21KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM ee netw940 inf 24KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM netwlan2 inf 8KB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM e netwv48 inf 9 8KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM BE netw2c inf 3 7KB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM Files of type INF files inf Please select hardware the driver is designed for Compex RL2000 PCI Ethemet Adapter 1 EI 22 Winbond W89C940 PCI Ethemet Adapter Only show hardware found on this computer Select an INF file Cancel Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 208 When selecting an INF file that contains several driver records for hardware you both have in the system and don t have you can filter the list by marking the appropriate checkbox e Remove a driver for a device which has not been found in the system X ER ee Remove the selected device From the installation list Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Secondary IDE Channel ginntinn mehde int S Primary IDE Channel ginntinn mehde int Intel A 82371AB7EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller ginntinn mehde int YHware SCSI Controller xl i E mE i ess uF Virtualizing the current system P2V Copy Let s assume that you re about to migrate to a brand new hardware platform with the latest operating system available for it Your current system is quite obsolete but you still need acc
84. 2972013 8 1737 AM fel Gackup_HDDO_20131029_0713 phi 96 KE 10 20 2013 1818 AM Files of type VO Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Backup HODD DO 20131029_0713 Comment Backup image 20131029 0713 File 2 Backup HDDO_ 20131029 _0713 Backup HDDO_20131029_0713 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 10 29 2013 8 02 57 AM View YD container detailed structure 5 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore Please select hard disk or partition to restore IF you need to restore several objects at once please use Linux based Recovery Media Name Type File system Size Used Z Backup HDDO20131029 0713 VD Archive 11 5 GB 12 362 911 744 Bytes F Basic MBA Hard Disk O PYHD i Virtual Hard Disk Drive 500 GE GS System Reserved Primary NTFS S50 MB 256 5 MB Primary NTFS 21 2 GE 10 5 GB m iNew Volume Primary NTFS 478 4 GBE 43GB Archive Details Hame Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 10 6 GB To continue click Next Data size to restore 21 2 GB If you need to restore several backup objects from a pVHD image in one operation please use the Linux based recovery media 6 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your com
85. 63 ps At 6 29 00 PENTE aun Edit Script Delete Task Refresh List Properties On every task you can get in depth information including e The task name e The full path to the generated script of the task e Scheduled time of launch e Statistics on the last launch e Scheduled time of the next launch e Used account information e Comments to the task Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 96 To easily manage tasks the program enables to arrange them according to a certain characteristic just by clicking on the required property items Oo This feature can be particularly beneficial when the Scheduled Tasks list contains too many You can also enable disable rename delete refresh or modify properties of the selected task Task Editor With the Task Editor you can easily modify properties of scheduled tasks To do that you should take the following steps 1 Select a task on the Scheduled Tasks list 2 Click the Properties button on the Scheduled Tasks list There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject General Schedule Program CAProgram Files Faragon Software progranyscripts eve Script C Program Files Faragon Softwarescripte ser 23101 3132945763 peal Edit Browse Comments Backup has been scheduled 10 23 2013 6 29 45 AM W Enabled wv ca 3 Inthe op
86. 7 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KB 4 9 KB J 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB J 107 972013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB 305 B 4 d Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB File C arc 101013062903344 pbf To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C EX F Mame Size Date e arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM are_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM Sites MB src 1071073062903344 bt 267GB 10 9 2013 11 53 13 PM PerfLogs 8 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Files of type Archive fles Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB File C4 arc 101013062903344 pbt Oo To know more o
87. 70 GB for storing video and another 50 GB for your favorite music collections to provide transparent data storage It is also worth mentioning to that with a hard drive properly partitioned such routine operations as files de fragmentation or consistency check will not be that annoying and time consuming any more By detaching the OS from the rest of the data you can tackle one more crucial issue in case of a system malfunction you can get the system back on track in minutes by recovering it from a backup image located on the other partition of the hard drive But that is not all drive partitioning may be used for If you are willing to play games in Windows while browsing the Internet in Linux 100 percent sure that no virus will attack your PC drive partitioning is a necessity In order to run several OSs on a single hard drive you are to create a corresponding number of partitions to effectively delineate the boundaries of each OS Data Sanitization Data security is a two sided problem It is to be made clear that providing confidentiality implies not only information to be stored properly but also be destroyed according to certain rules The first step to protecting yourself is to know exactly which security precautions work and which do not Many people believe the misconception that repartitioning a disk will result in complete destruction of its contents Actually that is not quite so Repartitioning the drive only alters reference
88. Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Local Disk C EX F Hame Size Date 2 E Local Disk C Ge arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 11 17 27 PM are_091013131559760 10 9 2013 11 22 08 PM O di arc_101013062156703 10 9 2013 11 22 08 PM J Je FLOOOOOOOOOoOoOoO000 10 9 2013 11 22 19 PM et E archive phi 309 Bytes 10795 2013 11 22 19 PM are_091013131559760 pf 23 3MB 10 9 2013 6 22 48 4M mr arc_O9101 313375622 1079 2013 6 38 02 AM Files of type Archive files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2073 11 22 19 PM Archive size 389 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File Canc 0910131315595760 archive phi Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 135 iy To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected file archive It is placed into the same destination as the base image This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Recovery Scenarios Correcting EFI parameters To specify a bootable device in the EFI boot entry please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon
89. B NTF 2 6 GB NTFS SI Disk Dev 1 Your computer may fail if any other OS has already been installed on the selected partition e Partition properties Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 85 W Yes want to format the partition Partition type NTFS Assign the following drive letter Surface test level More Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only file systems that can be correctly placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e OS Label Enter a label for the selected partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels will be displayed in the Boot Managers startup menu to help you boot the required operating system 05 label Windows 7 Result As the final step the wizard will offer you to insert a distributive CD DVD of the new operating system and restart the computer to launch the installation procedure The program will update your MBR so most likely you won t be able to start up any of the previously installed operating systems Please lau
90. DVD e Restoring a system partition from a network drive e Restoring a system partition from a local drive e Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive e Restoring a file increment e Restoring a file increment to a partition backup e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Copy Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to make a copy of a hard disk or a separate partition Cloning Hard Disks You can clone a hard disk of any file system During the hard disk copying process the program moves controlling records of used partitioning scheme the bootstrap code and on disk partitions That s why this operation cannot be substituted by simply copying all on disk partitions Copy Hard Disk Wizard The Copy Hard Disk Wizard is a traditional like wizard By going through its steps you configure all the necessary settings to launch the copy operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need You need at least two hard disks to carry out this operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 64 Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk There are other ways to start up this functi
91. Data E rr New olume 123 5 GB 154 6 GE NTFS 170 2 GE Linux Ext4 Volume size 363 374 ME 363 374 MB 489 928 MB Free space betore 1 26 554 MB 0 bytes 126 554 MB Free space after E Bytes OME Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but wall require more time es 9 The block of free space has been released Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev T E AAEN 312G 123 5 GB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved E Data E Hew Yolume 184 6 GE NT 170 2 GE Lin 179 10 Finally increase size of the system partition Call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 11 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right thus increasing its size y Are you sure you want to moveresize system volume Cy Tou are about to moveresize NTFS volume No label C Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p aj 31 Volume size a wel MB 12 418 MB 148 276 MB Free space betore 1 ME O bytes 135 556 MB Free space after 1 26 554 ME 0 bytes 135 556 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content aft
92. During the operation all contents of the right partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 184 joined partition By default the program offers an easy to understand folder name which can be customized however Please note that itis possible to select only FAT FAT S2 of NTFS adjacent partitions or FAT FATS of NTFS partitions separated from each other by free block ou will not be able to proceed further if no pair of partitions of these types are presented on the disk Select left partition from a pair you would like to merge Aight partition will be selected automatically Please note that content of right partition will be placed within a folder placed in a root of left partition ou can specity this folder name in a field below Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E System E Data E K Utils G 2 1 GE NTFS 26GB NTFS 3 2 GE NTFS Specity a folder name to keep content of right partition Folder Hame merged_partition_content To review the changes click Next 1 If a system partition is the right one of the selected pair Windows OS will become unbootable after the merge operation is over 7 Review the changes and complete the wizard 8 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish the
93. E SUDDO rans resend cicots E eae cuttin sre cinc tc cciatanscarssc secant cae tase cacnuceuenenes eres 29 CODY ODEratiON Sec cisceccestsiececsvicedcvedcaeiasiauawsesass EE AE S AEAEE A 29 Drive ParnttIONNE sisri a EE ON 30 Data Sanitization soei E O E E OE OE E E O O 30 Data Sec rity Standards ekeen a e A cau AAN e a a ENEA AN Ena 31 SCNCGUNING scscacsscutaucsdesstenccccaviesconsiacnewbonacdaauhenesdaawnesisnstansaestecnteiaotesnecaesuncdtonsauedacueniddnalannecnecuaciiasseuessueunanes 32 WVINGOWS COMDOMENIES scicciceusectasteccetds beset vevendceeceaeanc saa E EE O A E E 32 INtErTACe OVElVICW orenen E eteengdabeebaseouieeastneceeacaiwiiadenseneeveaineneacer 32 GY al Ken are Drs VOU eeireerenr mere ue ee ev ese ney E Oer ye ee Ser ee A 32 TOG PIB COM acco tetesocceuy E A T E tees 33 FRO OVA ANE erage cremate sree ema area wal ecerosin E na nso area ob T eg neg N cients neal esa A ciate acta A E 34 VirtuakOperations BAM erae a nce tineabaranleneseatena sales a aietincaeacanstg sans Attias a bat gules cee A AE 34 Express Mode BUTON marisi reri A E etunuuaaas ac asea E valerie ieeeucsaneeuec es 34 NS Ul igeat sectors uate ate tinea staatooeah cameras ase ate tsatistaeaed amen OR 35 DISK GIG PPTL OMS LIS sashes apsu sav E We dy iedceulie tanec dye dasetnen deta dy sideveta te chadyas eoetineds Wide dddcsatatens wedeneceairentetss 35 CONTEXESENSILIVG WIC Uae cdsuat ass attuned Ea A N E N E AE 36 Properes Pane aaen A E A alate 37 SEUS Ba ocina a E E N E N 38 S
94. EINES OVERVIOW cirina E N E EE E E E 38 Gener ar O DUONG cann E E E Wehdeanots anteee acasanouaaoaeue ne 38 Bac Urinal SEO DONS uinnean adeobesctaaudatiiceatincdc sequin autenutitieaudaniataeanquatebumastneatute sei pmneceascens hed suautl en antnntias ulamidaamae eabewmebetes 39 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved G nerakCopy andBackup ODLIONS esses pees naonna aa esse pea ates o ses res wa caeeg dues een eos 40 CD DVD BD RECORCING ODEONS ter a N 41 HOE PEOCESSING ODON S eseon e a a O aN suet 42 WIDE ODUONS erine A a A E a N 43 PANEMIOMING OD TOMS cendra E r cumecoluuepnesemenmeoans 43 EMAOUN rera errr a treme nists et eer rere ent Cn PSOen ey nae noe eRe ne eT nT PSOE ee aT Pe te Eee Rae ea eee cane eee eee ae ee 44 WA CAN IVIOCEODUONS srian te ctctescenaceracenasuaeeteasesau eet vaSeananeedevasiiccapenseasadna wadacsenssdes en E 44 FIE Sy Stell CONVElSIOl ODEON S 25 5cre c5 hen tvs ance ce cap eae cee ustenasaaien csv oskeeuies a nmeadet wane ceskaraude haa ecvaauiesaoewaeceiuaseeeraes 45 CODY BACK EXClUde Options ctcsenccriai sk teracne aa a k tent nested hatte E cuel Dee thine st he 46 Fle Backup EXClUde OPOS wisaciasaasesockecedrsane E E E wigu eee nceanneaouteas anes iewenaeceareenese as 47 FIG Back p include OD TIONS 2sacts cess cimeeortusarinebordeimolds E A a iat ceden 48 Loe PIES SOPUON Fdacisecte as ates ga hc a lua Aemetinaisua ui ose a r a r wadsudeuetaneiun 49 FL cae aire 0 0 bourne ee erm re ie rr
95. Ext Total size 29 1 GB Used space 512 9 MB Free space 6 6 GB To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 29 1 GB ao If you want to restore the image contents click the Next button In order to cancel click the Cancel button Using the Archive Database To open the Archive Database click the Archives tab on the Ribbon Panel The database window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 55 Backup amp Restore Mew Backup Format Partitioning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer Sot 7 Add an Archive to the Archive Database Restore Archive Restore Files Incremental Backup Check Archive Integrity Ce Mount Archive Delete from the Archive Database Restore YD Archive Synthetic Backup Incremental File Backup Restore File From Archive Unmount Archive Convert to Yirtual Machine Differential Backup Create File Complement Archives database Manage archives Mount options af Apply x Discard View Changes ir Undo Redo amp Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Scheduler Express Mode YD Archive of NTFS Volume New Volume iell Sie Si Basic data partition a50 E Boot Source Object Size 53GB E Recovery Archive Size 1 MB B System Volume Informati Creation Date 10 17 2013 312 08 AM a7 Comments Increment 1 Chain 2 fo 2
96. File Backup versus Sector Backup Since the advent of the computer age people were in the search of ways to guarantee data safety As a result we ve got now two principal approaches the file based backup and the sector based backup The main difference between the two lies in the way data is treated Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 22 A sector based backup operates with an image or a snapshot of the whole disk system or its separate partitions It not only includes the contents of all user made files but additionally contains the exact structure of directories information about file allocation file attributes and other related data Thus it enables to successfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain In contrast a file based backup takes into account a file system structure and only functions on a file or folder level So it is very efficient when archiving separate files or folders but in no way will help you back up a system partition You should understand pretty well that each of the two approaches is only good when properly chosen In the comparison table below you can see when this or that approach will suit you at most Sector Based Backup File Based Backup Merits It does not dependent on a particular file system Functioning on a file folder level it is ideal for Thus it can successfully process system or archiving se
97. ISOFTWARE GROUP G PARAGON Software GmbH Earacen Pa racon Heinrich von Stephan Str 5c 79100 Freiburg Germany Tel 49 0 761 59018201 Fax 49 0 761 59018130 Internet www paragon software com Email sales paragon software com Hard Disk Manager 14 Suite User Manual Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Contents PIV EROGUCKION p RNE E E A E E A E A E E E E 7 What s New in Hard Disk Manager 14 sesessesessecessecessececesoecssoecsescesesoesesoesesoecessecessecesescesesoecssoesssoesesoesesseo 7 Product COMPONENTS orrore a E A E E EE T A EE EE 8 Feature S OV CUO W sereni rir a E EEE N E E E OAS 9 FESTUTOS sissssaencacsesnsescsastewsncnsaaassedasnecusaneonsassvesscisdnaieneataedacsenemenenatensassaagasasdanaesscusanssnsakenediananalencdesneressuanenet 9 User Friendly Fault Minimizing IMeri aCe srera AAEN 9 PCr Fa E e A E ee a re 9 REOR FACO T E E TE O 10 Cony FAC INOS ae E se soa ycuGsssnaosasnenioseuniecoseinass uearensesesnersnatanecen sees 10 TAL geb Fe IP Ze are E ES ea te ce nee ene ne ne en ne eee ee ee ee ee ee eee 11 BO OE Management FACIES nesre cers gece catnavpeisG vnc A E A NS 11 Partition Hard Disk Management FaCilitiS scisscsiccssscnravsaanennesssanvesevadinednrsnucunodbestedstanuvdesavaaniiniesaandchorbodseduaenv arnduiittdehankdebovedus 11 WIDE FG MUMS S a E E E E E T 11 Automa zaton Facil ES eenen E E E E 11 P E E a E A E E T 12 Supported Data Erasure Algorithms
98. KB 9 3 2013 11 08 01 AM Y NTUSER DAT 3197985f 0b5d 11 64KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM ta lis NTUSER DAT S197995F ObSd 11 SIZ KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM ta A NTUSER DAT S197995F ObSd 11 S12 KB 9 3 2013 11 09 36 AM ia se ntuser ini 20 Bytes 9 3 2013 11 08 02 4M te W All Users 0 Bytes x 9 Ifa success you ll see a note that everything s ready to start the migration 10 Since we re going to use our SSD drive exclusively for Windows OS we additionally mark the appropriate option to let the wizard expand the resulted partition across all on disk space A all available space For the partition with O5 Use this option to expand the partition with 5 so it will use all available space on the disk This option is recommended if you are not going to create other partitions on the hard disk you re migrating to Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 199 11 The selected source 64 bit Windows 8 is configured to the uEFI boot mode so if we want to start up Windows from the target SSD we need to additionally mark the appropriate option Please note however the source disk will become unbootable after the migration is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector cals new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive Oo The option above will be available to the use
99. LUME l Primary FAT 32 5 8 GB 4 KE Archive Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Dis Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GE To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 120 GE If you select separate files or folders to restore the wizard will continue working as though you ve got to do with a file backup e A place to restore Selecting the destination please note all contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i H i Local Disk C Backup Capsule 200 3 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l j p 2 Unallocated 91 4 350 GE To help you get a clear cut picture of the operation outcome the program allows inspecting the resulted disk layout Restoring Partition e Size of the restored volume and free space before and after it on the disk Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 14607 167 MB 767990 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 753383 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 7533834 OMB 753383 MB Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 62 e Drive letter assignment after restore The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be a
100. MB 345 437 MB Please specty size of free space aler tha partion 7 OMB 349 265 MB Piaase select file system for new partition NTFS Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specify diwe letter Fw E Mere ten 6 Define parameters of the future partition By all means it has to be primary and since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue eas Ren pan oe Primary patton Please specify new parttion size 349451 gt 7MB 349 451 MB Please specty size of free space before the parttion O A OMB 349 437 MB Please specty size of free space after the partition 0 Al OMB 349 443 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS A Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specty drive letter F sw ad Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 193 Oo The Create Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 7 As a result of the operation we have got a newly created FAT32 partition just enough in size to comfortably work with Windows XP Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Vista C New Volume F 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2GB NTFS 8 Hide the Windows Vista partition to avoid writing any data on it during the Windows XP installation as it is the best way to provide system
101. NTFS New size 62815 287034 MB J 168463 e MB Free space before 0 224719 MIB U 10 Me Free space after 0 224219 MB E p 118570 le MB 7 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to your data partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB E NTFS pe NTFS New Volume 8 Choose the data partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 9 Move the slider to the right to increase size of the partition Click OK to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 187 Partition preview D NTFS New Volume New size 96 335358 MB 335358 Z MB Free space before 0 335262 MB Free space after 0 335267 MB D MB 10 Apply the pending changes 1 pending operations Apply changes Undo last ndo las 7 Undo all Apply b You have 1 pending operations P 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Move partition Operation progress Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 15 Time to finish 00 00 00 Restart enabled i Moving volume Scan volume Pernormance test Restart enabled Copy data by cluster Restart disabled Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Let s assume you re a Boot Camp user who s got Windo
102. PM di arc_091073140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM m arc 101013053218456 107972013 10 32 29 PM di arc_101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM m arc_ 10101 3062903344 107972013 11 53 11 PM di arc_101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM m arc_ 101013091 716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 4M di PerfLags 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM di Program Files 107972013 5 50 43 AM di Program Files 86 1079 2013 11 01 16 PM a Users 9 3 2013 2 40 22 PM a Windows 10 9 2013 11 01 29 PM E Local Disk F New Yolure G F pool server r 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name Jarc 01013093650000 7 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 126 Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask i specited all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and will not get Into the archive Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category Chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter ls Delete filter xlsx Delete filter wn Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx Delete filte
103. PM be arc_new pb 264 5 KB 10 9 2013 10 34 00 PM Switch to Archive List View r 4rchive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File C a new arc new pbt To continue click Next Cancel ie The section below i e Archive File Details displays a short description of the selected image including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons The next page i e What to restore displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 54 What to restore Please select one of the objectis to restore File system Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE H G New Volume E Primary NTFS 424GB 41 6MB H NEw VOLUME F Primary FAT 32 207GB 80KB ae E NEW VOLUME Primary Linux Ext 29 1GB 512 9 MB H EP New Volume Primary Apple HFS 229GB 14 7 MB Archive Details Hame NEW YOLUHE lt Volume label NEW VOLUME File system Linus
104. Panel then select Wipe Disk or Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e The hard disk partition to wipe Select a hard disk partition the data of which you want to destroy Please choose an object for wiping It can be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unallocated space you can set to wipe all data on the partition or only unoccupied space on it see the next step Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l E Local Disk C g data 2 e247 GE NTFS 2r4 93 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr E o Local Disk 499 9 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev f T o Unallocated 743 8 GB e Wipe mode This section enables to switch between two options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 92 Choose this option if you want to destroy completely all the data on the selected object f Clear wipe free space Choose this option if you want to destroy the traces of data that may have been left after an ordinary delete operation Wipe out all data Select the option to irreversibly destroy all on disk data of the selected object Clear wipe free space Select the option to destroy any remn
105. S 2r4 93 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr E o Local Disk 499 9 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i J o Unallocated 749 8 GB 4 On the Wipe Mode page select the wipe out all the data to irreversible destroy all on disk information Choose this option if you want to destroy completely all the data on the selected object f Clear wipe free space Choose this option if you want to destroy the traces of data that may have been left after an ordinary delete operation 5 On the Wipe Method page select a specific data erasure algorithm or choose to create a customized one in our case we prefer to use a certified military standard US DoD 5220 22 M fou can see the algonthm description and set the level of verfication on the next page f Create your own Data Sanitization method Tou can create your own Data Sanitization method i The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product 6 The next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wipe method US DoD 3220 22 M Overnvwrite all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verify Erase passes
106. S logical The Make Primary gt Logical option is only available when the selected partition is adjacent to the extended partition and vice versa The Make Primary gt Logical option of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Partition Attributes This chapter explains how you can change partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Volume Label etc Mark Partition Active Inactive The program enables to set an active inactive flag for primary partitions of a hard disk By default an operating system will boot only if its partition is active or bootable In order to mark a partition active inactive you should take the following steps 1 Select a primary partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Mark Partition as Active Inactive There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 89 A Are you sure you want to set the volume as active Tou are about to set the volume F No label NTFS as active If you already have active volumes this action might render your system unbootable 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation There can only be one active partition
107. Software GmbH All rights reserved 10 For PBF images e Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders e Differential backup to a sector image to only archive changes since the last full sector based image thus considerably saving the backup storage space To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials e Incremental backup to a file image to only archive changes since the last full or incremental file based image An incremental image is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup e File backup to a sector image It is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the disk imaging backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is cri
108. a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P UEFI fixup to clone restore migrate 64 bit Windows systems configured to the uEFI boot mode ConnectVD to connect a virtual disk as if it were an ordinary physical disk thus opening up all functionality available for physical disks to virtual e Separate x86 and x64 installation packages Please note that started from HDM 14 installation packages do not include Recovery Media Builder thus customers can build Linux or WinPE based recovery media only through special utilities Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder obtained from Paragon s website e Windows 8 1 support Our product has been tested to work fine on Windows 8 1 RTM e New user friendly interface that is fully compatible with the Windows 8 streamlined tile oriented interface Metro style Express Launcher Ribbon based full scale launcher GUI of the Linux recovery environment has also been uplifted Product Components In order to cope with different tasks the product contains several components e Windows based set of utilities is the crucial part of the product With the help of an easy to use launcher you may find and run tasks of any complexity in the field of data and system protection hard disk partitioning and cloning etc e Linux DOS based recovery environment is a multi platform bootable media that enables to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your har
109. accomplished under Windows Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition To back up required files or folders and then place the resulted image to a local mounted unmounted drive please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup ale There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page first take a look at the ready made backup templates If none of the options meets you needs just our case then select Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of certain data Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder PEELE ELE LEE Cther Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup imag
110. al 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Local Disk C i SPLITVOL E 168 4 GB NTFS 111 8 GE NTFS Splitted partition size 1 14556 MB Min size 72 MB F Max sze 224451 MB Please specify drive letter for the second partitions E By default the wizard allocates all free space to the original partition You should decide Oo for yourself how much of it should be given to the original and the new partitions Anyway we strongly recommend you to allow free space on both partitions 7 Review the changes and complete the wizard 8 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 183 Merging a system partition with an adjacent logical partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent logical partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To merge a system partition with an adjacent partition please do the following
111. allocated 231 6GB 9 Local Disk E 268 3 GB NTFS 0 51MB f 101 MB 511 993 MB Free space before 0 97 MB Sif Obytes 511 891 43 MB an LA a A Voimme SiZ aise Free space after 237 20152MB Sf Obytes 511 083 61 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any dats This slows you to keep the parttion s content after move exactly as t was but wil require more time Oo The Move Resize dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 4 Now you have a block of free space sufficient in size to hold a new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Vista C Unallocated 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2 GB 5 Create a new partition to install Windows XP To do that please call the context menu for a newly created block of free space right click of the mouse button and launch the Create Partition dialog Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 07 You se about to oesie a new perttion in Unallocated 341 2 GB ares Please select size postion and file stem of the new partion Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew l w New Volume F 341 2 GE NTFS Create new partition as Ce Please soecty new partion sine 2459451 7 MB 349 451 M Please spacy size of free space before the partition 0 al O
112. amp pf 22 2013 6 45 52 AM 22 2013 7 22 35 AM 1672013 8 18 50 PM 9 3 2013 1 54 48 PM 10 16 2013 8 21 05 PM 10 16 2013 8 18 29 PM 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM 9 3 2013 9 43 00 AM will be extracted to Za Address Es Disk Drives A Network Places T Utils arc_hew H m PerfLogs iI di Frogram Files E di Program Files 86 7 di Users H Windows 5 Click the OK button to accomplish the operation The current version of the program does not enable to access pVHD images and file archives with Volume Explorer Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 174 Resize Scenarios Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Let s assume that you re a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To secure yourself against a system malfunction or a virus attack you ve got nothing to do but make a backup of the whole partition which besides the operating system itself contains all your family photos favorite films and music program distributives whatever As a result you ll get a very huge backup image You can easily tackle this issue however by detaching your operating system from the rest of data To create a new partition on your hard disk please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Create There are other w
113. an see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished under Windows Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 171 File Transfer Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the File Transfer Wizard please do the following 1 Call the popup menu for the required backup image right click of the mouse button in the Archive Database and then select the menu item Restore File from Archive Thus you automatically open it with the File Transfer Wizard es Show archives Show all Ss amp Fi ES Type Creation Date source Object Size Archive Size Flag 1071172013 4 16 55 4M Basic MBAR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev fol GE 5 1 GB d P 1071072013 7 18 58 AM File level Archive g 119 Bytes J 10 10 2013 18 24AM Filedevel Archive EE ai peiye tz iie GHEE 248 Bytes je J 1071072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MER Hard Disk 3 Delete the Archive fram the Database 44 7 MB a 10 10 2013 7 08 17 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 V as 57 8 MB F 10 10 2013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 3 j u 49MB ie J 10 10 2013 6 55 43 AM File level Archive Incremental File Backup 389 Bytes A J J 1071072013 6 54 26 4M File level Archive Restore File From Archive 55 9KE ff 2 J 10 10 2013 6 46 07 SM File level
114. anel provides information on the object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or the Disk and Partitions List Local Disk C Yolume letter C VYolume label Ho label Type Primary File system NTFS Root entries 16 Sectors per boot 3 Sectors per cluster 8 Seral number S48E 4601 cE46 9R1E Partition ID OU NTFS ExFAT ReFS HTFS version 3 01 Volume size 499 6 GB Partition size 499 6 GB Used space 11 7 GB Free space 487 9 GB Active Mo Hidden No The Properties Panel helps to obtain the following data For a hard disk e Model e Serial number e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Total size in GB e Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders For a partition e Drive letter assigned to the disk e Volume label if exists e Type of the logical disk e File system e Root entries Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 38 e Serial number e NTFS version e Partition ID e Total size used space and free space in GB etc Besides you can modify practically any partition property by clicking on the required value For a block of free space e Total size in GB Status Bar This is the bottom part of the main window The Status Bar displays menu hints for each item the cursor points to Settings Overview To call the Settings dialog please click Tool Button then select
115. ants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data Oo The Clear Free Space operation is available only for Logical and Primary partitions of known file systems Wipe method Here you can select a specific data erasure algorithm or create a customized method by marking the appropriate option US DoD 5220 22 M Tou can see the algonthm description and set the level of verfication on the next page f Create your own Data Sanitization method Tou can create your own Data Sanitization method In case you preferred to use a specific algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M Overnvrite all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verify Erase passes count 3 Very passes count 1 Percentage of sectors to check 100 Approximate wipe time 00 21 19 You can skip verfying completely or partly by disabling it or reducing percentage of sectors to check Please note it would be a deviation from US DoD 5220_22 M Oo The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product In case you preferred to create a customized algorithm the next page of the wizard e
116. any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD BD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select your system disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Look in D NTFS 0 on Disk 3 New Volume EEEE 9 RECYCLE BIN 9 System Volume Information oo Users Hanane Fa New folder FT Delete F File name Imntdisk sdd1 Select File type All files y Cancel 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress oe ae eae EEE Operation progress Copied so tar 0 1 MB Overall progress Lea a SaaS Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDO Parti Item 1 of 1 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is comp
117. aragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 219 2 lrun an operation and restart the machine as required but it just boots back into Windows without accomplishing the operation Please run chkdsk f for the partition in question 3 cannot create a new partition on the disk There can be a number of reasons for that e The program cannot create a new partition on a dynamic disk e The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition 4 cannot copy a partition There can be a number of reasons for that The source or target disk you select is a dynamic disk 4 primary partitions or three primary partitions and an extended one already exist on the target disk 5 need to copy a partition But when selecting a place where to make a copy always get a crossed circle sign no matter which partition is selected The program enables to copy a partition only to a block of un partitioned space If you don t have a block of free space on your hard disk please delete or reduce an existing partition to accomplish the operation 6 cannot do anything with my USB flash drive get a crossed circle sign when trying to select any area on it Some USB flash drives don t have the MBR Master Boot Record that s the cause of your problem To fix the issue please use the Update MBR function of our program or fixmbr of the Windo
118. aragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 45 1 We strongly recommend you to enable this mode e Close progress dialog automatically Mark the checkbox to automatically close the progress dialog after accomplishing operations File System Conversion Options Virtual mode options Operations mode lf Allow virtual mode Set this option on to carry out all the operations virtually ou will be able to commit the changes or rollback all of them or the last one IF you switch this option off the operations Will be carted out immediately Close progress dialog automatically Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the changes This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when converting FAT and NTFS file systems By default the program takes locale regional settings from the system Problems might occur however because of different standards for file names and file time stamps Created Modified and Last Access Time of NTFS and FATxx file systems To tackle problems of that kind you can manually set e Time zone to use during the convert operation NTFS keeps file timestamps in GMT Greenwich Mean Time while FAT uses a fixed local date and time The program takes proper account of these differences and enables to adjust timestamp values An incorrectly chosen time zone might lead to inability to launch certain software e Language for file names to use duri
119. arc 10101 3062903344 10797 2013 11 53 11 PM di arc 101013091536750 10710 2013 2 15 43 4M di arc 101013091 716250 10710 2013 2 17 49 4M l di arc 101013140759053 10710 2013 7 08 19 4M S J arc 101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 11 52 AM H AR 264 5KB 10 10 2013 7 11 52AM_ Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GB File C farc_101073741139475 arc_1010731 41139475 pbf Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter File Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 60 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want bo restore from Name Type Size F FE Archive File Level Archive Fo9 5 KE 603 660 Bytes HM A C EC E arc 091013140825801 eM arc _091013140825801 pfi File 576 KB fe M arc 091013140825801 ptm File 1 5KE To continue click Next Data size to restore 589 5 KB e A place to restore
120. are GmbH All rights reserved 90 ww Are you sure you want to change label an voume Fy Please specify a volume label for easier recognition of your volume Please enter new volume label New volume ee 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Hard Disk Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry hard disk operations supported by the program Converting Basic MBR to GPT The program allows you to easily convert a basic MBR disk into a basic GPT disk while keeping its contents intact The operation is quite safe for the on disk data but you should know that only 64 bit Windows OSes since Vista are able to boot from this type of disks So if you ve got a 32 bit Windows OS accommodated on a disk you d like to convert to GPT it won t start up after the operation is over In order to convert a basic MBR disk to a basic GPT you should take the following steps 1 Select a basic MBR hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hard Disk gt Convert to GPT hard disk ra Are vou sure you d like to convert Basic MEBER Hard Disk 0 OF aan ae Y Mware VMware Virtual S S5051 Disk Dey ta GPT Please Note Despite the fact that all on disk contents remain intact during the operation Your OS may no longer boot corectly for Windows XP 32 bit for instance does not support GPT disks 3 The op
121. ario to know how to tackle this issue 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 From the list of all found Windows systems if several select one you need to adjust to the new hardware If you re willing to adjust them all just re launch this wizard for each Os E Volume TO Label De Capacity Microsoft Windows XP Local Disk C No label 20GB 5 There are two execution modes to choose from fully automatic and advance Below we will go set by step through the automatic scenario to show the whole process and then take a closer look at specifics of the advance scenario g Adjust the OS to the new hardware autdatically Perform the 05 adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers Set parameters for the OS adjustment Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers Y 6 Select Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically 7 The wizard will automatically accomplish all the necessary actions Process driver MnP ecwandd int from Windows driver repository L The only action that might be required from your side is to set a path to an additional driver repository in case the wizard has failed to find drivers for some boot critical devices in the built in Windows repository Generally together with new hardware you get its drivers for different operating systems on removable media mos
122. ata on Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware YVAN ware Yirtual SCSI Disk Dev Select left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Local Disk C fy 2247 GB NTFS 274 9 GE NTFS e Resulted size of partitions Redistribute the unused space between the partitions with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis E o data Z E 16 5 GE NTFS Lett volume size Right volume size 269898 MB 4 Me F 1750 MB ME Result After the operation is completed the unused space between the specified partitions will be redistributed according to your needs Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition e Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Redistribute Free Space Wizard The Redistribute Free Space Wizard helps to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions By default the wizard adds to the target partition all existing blocks of the free space Besides you can specify partitions to act as a space donor The wizard will automatically recalculate positions of the pa
123. ated 749 9 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware YHware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Unallocated Unallocated Space 113 9 GE Properties Panel Total size 499 9 GE Status Ba Disk and partitions list B i a No changes Tool Button Ribbon Panel Virtual Operations Bar Express Mode Button Disk Map Disk and Partitions List Context sensitive Menu Properties Panel Status Bar O oO N WD UW A W N e A number of panels offer similar functionality with a synchronized layout The program enables to conceal some of them to simplify the interface management Tool Button By clicking on this button the user can e Launch auxiliary wizards Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 34 e Get access to the program settings e Collect and send a log files package to the Support Team e Goto Paragon s website to download a free update register the product visit Paragon s Knowledge Base etc Ribbon Panel An area across the top of the program s window is called the Ribbon Panel It makes almost all the product capabilities available to the user in a single place A Ribbon Tab is an area on the panel that contains buttons organized in groups by functionality Each button corresponds to a certain program wizard or dialog If you d like to hide all ribbon tabs click on the arrow button at the right top corner of the program window Virtual Operations Bar T
124. ating System Getting your computer ready to install a new operating system especially when it is going to be an additional OS in the system is a rather complicated task that implies quite a number of operations from allocating space to create a new partition resize redistribution of free space to formatting of the newly created partition to a particular file system and checking its surface for bad sectors to avoid possible data loss Operating systems today are being supplied with basic tools of partitioning that only enable to create a partition in case there is enough unallocated space on the disk and then format it to the specified file system type Our program offers a handy Install New OS Wizard to easily carry out all the necessary operations to install a new operating system Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Install New OS Wizard Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to install a new operating system The program offers two ways of installing a new OS i e to create a new primary partition for it or use an existing one Where would vou like to install an operating system A new partition will be created by using unallocated space of your hard disk or unused space of existing partitions tis the most preferable way
125. ays to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition The wizard is especially designed to minimize your participation in finding an appropriate place for it and its resulted size The only thing you re to do is to choose between several modes The most relevant thing here is the amount of space that will be allocated for that partition For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode The result you will get after applying the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev ge Local Disk C l i Mi 406 8 GE NTFS 7 Please select the method of new partition creation C Advanced Mode Use 46 4 GB to create a partition More info The number of available methods depends on your disk layout 0 To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard 4 Thats basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All
126. bact log file truncation to specify a storage life span for the stubact log file Infinite not to empty the file ever Minimal to have the file emptied all the time Custom to set a certain storage life span for the file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied We strongly recommend you not to choose the Minimal option as in case of having 1 problems with the program our Support Team won t be able to study operation logs thus help you out Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 50 FTP Sites Options D FIP site settings Look in 1 ie im Address itp A Create FIPISFTP location Ww Use SFTP connection Address sftp sttp hidnive strato com Port 22 Anonymous login Allow OpenSSH key based authentication Login RRERREHRREHE Password W Save password Name sftp hidrive strato com ren In this section you can manage online backup storages located on FTP or SFTP servers By clicking on available buttons you can create modify delete an FTP SFTP location etc To create an FTP SFTP location you ve got to specify a number of options e Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server if necessary e Address Type in an address to the desired server e Port Specify the required port 21 for FPT and 22 for SFTP by default e Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymou
127. bon Panel then select Backup to VD Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 117 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select partitions or entire hard disks you d like to back up by using Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Click Next to proceed Press Shift of Ctrl to select several objects at once a Hew Votoine E 470 4 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a Unallocated 499 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Unallocated a 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a Unallocated 115 9 GB Change backup settings Note This option is recommended for advanced users only You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 Specify location of the resulted pVHD in the Backup destination section If you d like to save it locally either enter a full path to the target folder in the corresponding field or use the Browse button to find it Backup destination Backup location C AUsers AdministratorsDesktop dry Ayvallable space 1
128. c MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Local Disk E ie Local Dis l f oe Unallocat 171 8 GB FAT S2 154 6 GE NTFS 162 GB e Destination disk Select a hard disk with enough unallocated space to perform the operation The wizard will create a copy of Local Disk F from Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Estimated size of this volume after selected files and folders will be excluded from copy operation 23 3 GB 275 124 715 616 Bytes The copy mill be created on Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 Mware VA ware irtual SCSI Disk Dev Please select where to create a copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey if o Unallocated 119 9 GB ale The program enables to copy a partition to a block of free space which is smaller than the partition itself taking into account only actual amount of data e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 67 Your hard disk after changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Where to place a copy Please specify the size of the new partition 23962 76 HEB 122 879 HEB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 4 O ME 122 803 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 3891 T O HB 122 802 HEB Partition size Define th
129. cal Disk C im g g Hame Size Date S 2 E Local Disk C E arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 11 17 27 PM arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM arc 091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM arc 091013140817551 10 9 2013 11 08 51 PM arc _091013140825801 10 10 2013 6 51 48 AM are_10101305321 8496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM are_101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM are_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM are_101013091536750 10 10 2019 2 15 43 AM are_101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM dif 101013091744875 10 10 2013 2 17 52 AM fe ciit_1010713091 744875 pb SB KB 1040 203 2 17 52 AM diff 101013091 744875 pfm 31KB 10 10 2013 2 17 524M T Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume G Comment Ho comment Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 14 2 GB Used pace 163 8 MB Free space 14 1 GB File C arc_1010130917162507 dift 101013091744875 pot oO To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe How to Restore page specify the way your archive will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location h he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring MES ma arean Exist on Your compute
130. cancca witness nEaN A AEE AAE AIO E AR aa disuse 21 Fle Backup Versus Sector BACKUD wien Gu cece a a aa a a a A 21 BaCKUDIYPES ei E aecaesauauneaaaectoanarecneouecaweanteasesaioaneast ga saraweaucceuueneen Woes Ante toneranceseehoreus 22 BAC KU SEONG noar aE aniuboraeiiuite take aman E A E eaeabaltacets ames 24 PCO CIV ARG SEO Sates tesserae E st satan saa e aon enc sme sansa es Sc no vasc enn tens ae neces 24 System VINEU ANZ ACION scseut siicsucans vacsaet A E EA 26 Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy Service csscscscsccccscscccsccscsccccccscsceccccscsceccccecsceseecececes 26 Offline Versus Online Data PrOCESSING sxrsstet st ticatsaitdacad ices A nora ntaat A 26 Paragon Hot Processing Technology ccccccsssccccssecccceseccccuneccccesececausececceecceseusecessusecessuneceeeenceesaueceseunecesseneceeseusesetsuneees 27 Volume SMa OW CODY SEVICE erann N a a agile eaeiuenstueatob a Gasie supe actusancveneaecesans 27 DV FID SUD DOM ic secacscesasevasinacinssccssucveveesnccedsconceseceses esecues veteasecencecantec va sceceeceupacsubeer aivsecasaeesseamnewecocenerneeesiawusees 28 GPT VERSUS IVIBR vasscsscceaanancsaniasinavucseasawansesinasndaesaedansssecwucslesisar emai ssenedil Ran uaesiducawedaan eusauleasovedenpasedaseusaucaen sawaase sions 28 UEF BOOt CHANGIN EES sisicscrsicshecactcctetilak aia Goa ieee ace ances ca eh casa a ac eden eda cece a 28 Apple BOGE Camp arcara EET TEE cqwakdcaaonacues tesa dauecawemiek dau T SENER 29 GA OI
131. ce in one block the wizard enables to redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions when necessary If the total amount of free Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 71 space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it Your hard disk before the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E Unallocated 119 8 GE Your hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey New volume curent size is 119 6 GB Min Volume Size 0 Bytes 122751 ME Max Volume Size 119 8 GB reboot to create the partition and then automatically boots the system again The ri If a partition to resize is locked and cannot be processed the wizard makes the system rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows You can also choose whether the future partition will be primary or logical by marking the appropriate checkbox e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set a number of additional parameters Tour hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Volume label New Volume Assign the following drive letter E Partition type From the pull down list select a file system th
132. ce is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it If the partition is locked and cannot be resized the wizard makes the system reboot to create the backup capsule and automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows 6 Start the operation by clicking the Next button or return to correct the settings After the operation is completed you can place backup archives into the created backup capsule Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image into the backup capsule please do the following 1 Create the backup capsule with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 111 i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions a Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition OEE EEE EEE eee e eee e t
133. chive library Choose this option to skip archive files stored in archive library This will reduce operation time and backup image size W Automatic BCO update Add Boot entry for target partition to BCD hive on copy restore source partition This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during copy and backup operations e HDD raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy back up a hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy a partition in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation e Skip OS auxiliary files Mark the checkbox to skip OS auxiliary files like pagefile sys hiberfil sys etc thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Skip archive files stored in archive library Mark the checkbox to skip backup images registered in the archive database thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Automatic BCD Update Unmark the checkbo
134. cking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp be Be J 10710 2013 6 46 07 AM File level Archive r1 3 ME 4 5 ME k z 1 G 10710 2013 2 17 49 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE 3KE 3 MHo co 1 amp 10710 2013 2 1719 AM New Yolume G 14 2 GE ee ME 1 TS 1079 2013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 26 7 GB g j 17 J 10797 2013 17 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 1 J 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 49KB ke 3 1 J 10797 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB T 1 J 10797 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes J tS 1079 2013 7 08 28 4M NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME a 1 E 10797 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 8 KE 1 G 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM New Volume E 10 5 GB 47 MB 1 T 1079 2013 6 16 13 AM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 5 2 GE 1 G 1079 2013 5 52 57 AM Local Disk C 499 6 GE 5 1 GE 1 Switch to File View Archive File Details Total sze 71 9 MB 75 470 833 Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File LC farc_09701 37406825801 40 archive phi Base archive Carce 0910137 40825801 farce 09701 31 40825801 pbt To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description
135. cme ek rer Re en ere en rere ee ney Ten ere Ten epee re ee nares E en terry eer eres 50 VIEWING DISK Properties sron enaa a oa E A a a sac AA uaa Rca aaa Ea aaa EAEAN 51 Viewing Imag Properties mesccssscocvscsesccscaansansseneeceessanconeneuetendeuateesanenesaertienensabguetentenatidanetenesenncaasenselguateuteieons 51 Usine TA CRES CONE VV IZA Ol a2acondecacoeosearucdstetonseancsetoandedectenseaassacetssaesaas es andedasaeodsasns e dunesesseaneeegeanacessneereusee 51 Using the Archive Database vic cones iaeines oui E ra A a dacnvenacet a a 54 Data Back p and MeOSCUC nenei a a anavi eoamanasacsuea va mednanisens 55 Creatine BACK IMACSS er cetesntees idea a tele diteee idee te Meta ish tate a etait ach ete Got net cae eesti AO 55 Restoring Systemcand Dataene neon cee ie ee ema a eee beer eden eee 58 CODY TASKS eranan a a aa a a E anal etesunauasubaacaneoacnaasasuamaieineaiesaadtasteresaranrs 63 Conine Rard DiSkKereiciscri a a a A a a a ooh lata 63 COnN SP AREILIOMS eure N a aa aA a a r a cantatas EN SN 66 BOOU VIAN ARSC ING ea E A E 67 PAmlitiOn Management ainiaan E a E A E aaa 68 Basic Partitionine OPerations crosce nn a a a a a N aaa 69 Advanced Partitioning Operations seiccsetdascaseeb acco tasaces est a heroes ee be eee ee ces 77 CPaneine ears dd ai A TIDUS enn oe nn Pe ers ene A ee eer eee 88 Hard Disk Manage Ment isi csacacicsesasiass casasiecoienieiadaegsiaaeseiccesaanurwncdioulacaeseasweardareauawanabdeces eaaesaasieansgueduadaauendes 90 Con
136. continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 218 Welcome to Log Saver Wizard Please enter e mail address which was used while registering this product With its help Paragon Support Department will be able to associate your log files with your request through on line request system TEST _ USER gmail com Please enter description of encountered issue Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents 3 Browse for the required location of the log files package or manually provide a full path to it Click Save to initiate the operation Specify folder and file name for ZIP archive Look irr New Volume E l rA T Hame Size Date F Local Disk C DVD Drive D B New Volume E l F NEW VOLUME F File name TEST_USER gmail cor 2073 08 06 23 24 zip Files of type IP archives This function is also available under Windows Troubleshooter Here you can find answers to the most frequently asked questions that might arise while using the program 1 Itry to run an operation but the program claims my partition is in use and suggests restarting the computer There are a number of operations that cannot be performed while your partition is in use or locked in other words Please agree to reboot your machine to make the program accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Copyright 1994 2013 P
137. count To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the Restore Wizard 3 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image So you should take the following steps to do that e Select Network as a backup destination Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 146 Look tr E Network E EN F E Disk Drives E Local Disk C zc us i DWD Drive D Physical partitions so System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Prirary NTFS EA Backup Capsules f Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 HN Network places E i Network e Map a network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Look in E Network 7 TA Fd F Name Size Date E Network Remote location mapping A network share ey Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Oo You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator
138. count 3 Very passes count 1 Percentage of sectors to check 100 Approximate wipe tine 00 21 19 You can skip verfying completely or partly by disabling tt or reducing percentage of sectors to check Please note it would be a deviation from US DoD 5220_22 M Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 213 7 Review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Your hard disk before the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i re Local Disk C 7 a 224 GE NTFS 49GB NTFS Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev p Unallocated 499 9 GB 8 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Extra Scenarios for WinPE Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account Adding specific drivers The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support Anyway you ve got the option to add drivers for specific hardware with a handy dialog To add drivers for specific hardware please do the following 1 Click Load Drivers 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for an INF file of the required driver package located on a floppy disk local disk CD DVD or a network share Then click the Open button to initiate the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Softwar
139. cremental archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full or incremental file based archive It is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup incremental Chain to a File Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday E ee am increment 1 increment 2 _ Monday restore point zl Base File Backup Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point File Increment to a Sector Backup File Increment to a Sector Backup is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the sector based backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 24 Backup Storage Our program supports several techniques of storing backup images Let s take a closer look at them all to understand what kind of storage is able to provide better security You can place a backup image to a local partition Despite the fact that it is the most convenie
140. d disk To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform You connected your system hard disk to the brand new PC and tried to start up the operating system you do know for sure now that this operation had been doomed to failure from the very beginning With our program you can easily tackle this naughty problem Before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e Your OS is unrolled on the new computer not in a backup image To make a Windows physical system bootable on different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Oo The WinPE based environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 202 consult the Adding specific drivers scen
141. d disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Both platforms have their strong sides for instance Linux can boast support of FireWire i e IEEE1394 or USB devices It enables to burn CD DVD discs However there can be some difficulties with detecting new hardware DOS in its turn has no problems of that kind but is limited in features The Linux DOS recovery environment requires no installation and can be of great help when the system fails to boot Besides it offers a Windows XP like environment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 9 WinPE based recovery environment Especially for keen followers of Windows our product offers the option to prepare a WinPE based bootable media Unlike the Linux DOS recovery environment it can boast an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version can However its system requirements are much tougher Features Overview This chapter dwells upon key benefits and technical highlights of the product Features Let us list some of the features User Friendly Fault Minimizing Interface Graphical representation of the data to gain a better understanding A handy Launcher to easily find and run the required tasks Comprehensive wizards to simplify even the most complex operations A context sensitive hint system for all functions of the program Previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual operat
142. d to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 7 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But one of your partitions has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other on disk partition please do the following 1 Inthe main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Disk map m Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Di IL Data E Hew Volume a2 N 244 1 GB NTFS 234 3 GB Linux Extd Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated 499 9 GB 2 Choose a space donor partition and then call a context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Back Up Parti
143. d with rectangle bars that contain small sized bars These small sized bars represent logical disks Their color depends on the file system of the appropriate partition By looking at the size of the bar s shaded area it is possible to estimate the used disk space For the selected at the moment object there s the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations Disk map Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Large sized bars display the following information about physical disks e Type basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Manufacturer e Model Small sized bars display the following information about logical disks and blocks of free space e Volume label if exists e Drive letter e Total size e File system The Disk Map is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on the map the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Disk and Partitions List The Disk and Partitions List is another helpful tool that helps to get a clear cut picture on the current state of the system hard disks and partitions All objects disks partit
144. de a path Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 8 to an ISO image of the WinPE recovery environment which can be prepared either with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder e Uplifted Recovery Media Builder Paragon s Recovery Media Builder a simple alternative to Boot Media Builder can help you prepare either Linux or WinPE based bootable environment on a USB thumb drive or in an ISO file previously only creation of WinPE images on USB was supported Unlike Boot Media Builder it doesn t require to have Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit ADK or Automated Installation Kit WAIK installed in the system However it can only be used under Windows 7 or higher and its functionality is rather limited e Complete support of Windows Storage Spaces Windows 8 has come with a storage management feature called the storage spaces It enables to easily manage large storage pools In fact it s an expandable virtual container of defined data size allowing users to add it as many physical drives as they want until the defined virtual disk s limit is reached This makes it easy to include additional storage devices without having to set up and manage each attached physical storage drive e Uplifted Linux Recovery Environment Started from HDM 14 the Linux based recovery environment is based on SuSe 12 3 more hardware devices supported and includes P2P Adjust OS Wizard to successfully migrate
145. de enabled get the following error error code 0x12016 VSS can t read volume data Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 220 You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 12 When trying to back up to a network share get the following error i o error or can t open create file Please check whether you ve got a permission to write to the selected destination or not 13 When trying to restore a backup archive get the following error Can t restore to current selection or Archive does not fit Most likely you re trying to restore a backup of the whole hard disk to a partition or vice versa 14 set up a timetable for a task but it fails to execute There can be a number of reasons for that Windows Task Scheduler does not work properly Check whether it is so or not by scheduling a simple task call Notepad through scheduling You don t have permission to write to the selected backup destination Glossary Active Partition is a partition from which an x86 based computer starts up The active partition must be a primary partition on a basic disk If you use Windows exclusively the active partition can be the same as the system volume In the DOS partitioning scheme only primary partitions can be active due to limitations of the standard bootstra
146. do before automatically rebooting the system and accomplishing the operation in a special boot up mode Timeout between attempts in seconds Here you can set a time period between different attempts to start Microsoft VSS Switch between hot processing technologies Mark the checkbox to automatically switch between Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft VSS if one of them is unavailable at the moment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 43 Wipe Options ied Wipe options Default wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M Overnvwrite all addressable locations with a character its complement then a random character and verity Here you can set a specific data erasure algorithm that will be used by default during wipe operations 0 The list of supported military and government standards may vary for your product Partitioning Options amp Partitioning Options Confirmations W Ask for volume label before partition delete Ask confirmation when converting FATT6 to FAT 32 This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during partitioning operations e Request confirmation before partition deletion Mark the checkbox to activate an additional security mechanism Thus when going to delete a partition you will be automatically requested to enter its label e Request confirmation when converting FAT16 to FAT32 Mark the checkbox to automatically request confirmation before
147. dows partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Please specify new sizes of selected partitions Selected part of Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Dis E o Hew Yolume F E 259 3 GE NTFS Left volume size Right volume size 246381 MB H ME H ME 2 MB On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 7 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 189 Creating Dual Boot Systems Windows Vista Windows XP Most likely you have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To install the second operating system you need to re
148. e Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 125 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Mame Size Date 2 H ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM f arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM f arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM f arc 101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM f arc 101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM f FerfLogs 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Program Files 1079 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files x86 10 9 2013 11 01 16 Pe ProgramData 10 9 2013 11 01 18 Pe gz di System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM ta Users 9 3 2019 2 48 22 PM J E di Administrator 107972013 10 26 37 PM qa Default 6 22 2013 12 11 25 Pe AppData 8 22 2013 8 36 30 AM m u ae 6 22 2011 3 8 36 30 AM Hi 6 22 2013 7 45 52 AM i Downloads 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM f Favorites 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM Links 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Music 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM f Pictures 8 22 2013 36 30AM 5 On the Backup Destination page select a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned disk as a backup destination Lookin E Local Diskit AAA Hali Date e E Local Disk C di arc _091013125156055 107972013 11 17 27 PM a arc_091073131559 60 10 9 2013 11 22 08 PM ad arc_0910131 33756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc _091013140817551 107972013 11 08 51
149. e E 470 4 GB NTFS Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 21721 10835 MB 21721 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition U OMB Please specify size of free space after the partition E OME Partition Restore Options 8 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 152 What would you like to da Restore now Restore specified objects after completing the wizard t Generate script Create a script to restore the specified objects later 9 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 11 After completing the operation please reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a local drive Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble after having installed brand new software But you ve got a backup of the system partition on a local disk That s
150. e user involving the use of the cmd diskpart and bcdedit tools Paragon has a better way Introducing an elegant technology realized at the user side as one simple option you can define a system GPT volume you re willing to boot from Below is a list of wizards where the uEFI switch boot device option can be found e Copy Hard Disk Wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 29 e Copy Partition Wizard e Restore Wizard e Migrate OS to SSD Wizard e Boot Corrector i The uEFI switch boot device option is only available through the 64 bit WinPE media at the moment Apple Boot Camp Boot Camp is a special utility to help you set up a dual boot system Mac OS X and 32 bit Windows XP Vista on Intel based Macs It enables to securely re partition your hard disk resize an existing HFS partition to create a separate partition for Windows and then launch the installation process With Boot Camp all the necessary drivers will be at your disposal Moreover after Windows has been installed it will serve as a boot manager to choose what operating system to start up It is strongly recommended not to modify the hard disk configuration with Windows Disk Manager Otherwise it may lead to unexpected consequences right up to BSOD and inability to boot in Windows XP Vista Please use our program to correctly update both MBR and GPT 64 bit Support The bulk of software today is written for a 32 b
151. e GmbH All rights reserved 214 Look in r Disk Drives E Local Disk C E archive_db 8 7 2013 11 57 39 PM 8 7 2013 11 13 10 PM Ej is NETOLKRT INF 94KB 5 19 2003 5 44 10 AM Network Places ha H Oemsetup inf 640 Bytes 10 17 2002 7 28 08 AM H di Image Storage 6 7 2013 10 49 00 PM E Ji PerfLogs 7 13 2009 7 20 08 PM H di Frogram Files 8 7 2013 10 34 18 PM id Program Files amp 26 8 7 2013 10 29 10 PM iI di Users 6 26 2013 5 29 22 AM H di Windows 8 7 2013 11 05 06 PM CD Drive D CD_ROM H Boot X File name NETO LKAT INF Files of type Inf Files i To know how to map a network share please consult the Configuring network scenario 3 You will be notified on the successful accomplishment of the operation Click Yes to load another driver or No to close the dialog Driver c drivers inetdikrt inf has been loaded successfully Would you like to load another driver s Oo The WinPE recovery environment can either be 32 or 64 bit so are to be drivers for injection Configuring network If your local network has a DHCP server a network connection will be automatically configured once the WinPE recovery environment has been started up Otherwise you will need to do it manually with a handy dialog by providing an IP address a network mask default gateway etc Besides with its help you can easily map network shares To manually set up a network connection and map
152. e base image Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating an increment to a full file backup To update a file backup please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Incremental File Archive 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base file archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 134 SRE 7 107 972013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB T 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB T p 10797 2013 11 22 19 PM File level Archive 24 KB Be 1 J 107 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KB he 1 E Switch to File view Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2073 11 22 79 PM Archive size 389 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File Canc 0970137 37559760 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e
153. e full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Reboot Restart the computer e Power off Shut down the computer While working with the recovery environment you might experience some inconvenience caused by possible video artifacts It is just a result of changing video modes and in no way will affect the program functionality If this is the case please wait a bit and everything will be OK Normal Mode When the Normal mode is selected the Linux launch menu appears You can copy an entire hard disk or ts partitions to new locations You can also save them as image files for later restoration Please select the drive its partition if necessary and then activate the Hard Disk or Partition pull down menu and select the operation needed Paragon Hard Disk Manager simple Restore Wizard Disk Copy Wizard Undelete Partition Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 19 e Hard Disk Manager enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration e Simple Restore Wizard allows restoring hard disks and partitions e Disk Copy Wizard hel
154. e hard disk like other people who purchase a computer with a preinstalled operating system So besides OS it holds all your documents favorite music movies and family photos This type of configuration is certainly not optimal for effective data organization and safety First it negatively affects the system huge amount of data aggravated by its inevitable excessive fragmentation causes poor performance in file search access and read write operations Second it s inconvenient for the user system files and folders piled up with media and documents besides obvious difficulties in transparent organization become a naughty problem in case of a system malfunction Split Partition Wizard can help you detach the operating system and data or different types of data by splitting one partition to two different partitions of the same type and file system you just select a partition then files and folders you d like to move to the new partition finally redistribute free space between the two partitions if necessary and here you are Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 181 Before you start please take into account the cases when the split operation is impossible to perform e Partition s type is not supported you have selected a non standard primary or logical partition e The selected partition is located on a dynamic disk e You ve already got 4 primary partitions on a Basic MBR disk e You ve already got 3 p
155. e letters e Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 216 By clicking Disconnect Drive you can delete an existing network share if necessary 5 Click the Network identification tab to change a network name of your computer generated automatically and a workgroup name Network identification i S9NEQVGHeUnIee O Computer Name MININT DGKUSAY Workgroup WORKGROUP Primary DNS suffix 6 By default the wizard saves all network settings in the netconf ini file located on the WinPE RAM drive thus it will only be available until you restart the computer However you can just once configure your network device and then save this file to some other destination for instance a local drive and this way avoid constant re configuration just by providing a path to it So Click Save to file to save the netconfig ini file to the required destination Network troubleshooter Network Configurator includes a traceroute ping utility that enables to get detailed information on particular routes and measure transit delays of packets across an Internet Protocol IP network So with its help you can easily track down problematic nodes 1 If you need to ping some network host please select Ping then type in the required IP address or its name Click
156. e newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 72 Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 37 Tou are about to create a new partition in Unallocated 119 9 GB area Please select size position and file system of the new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i E o Hew Volume H i E 114 7 GB NTFS Create new partition as Please specify new partition size 1175464 OMB 122 879 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition Faas OMB 122 870 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition a732 OMB 122 870 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specify drive letter H z w More options e Define whether the partition will be Primary Extended or Logical
157. e program functionality will be limited On the Ready to Install the Program page click Install to start the installation or Back to return to any of the previous pages and modify the installation settings The Final page reports the end of the setup process Click Finish to complete the wizard Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 16 To start Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 under Windows please click the Windows Start button and then select Programs gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager The program provides wide opportunities in the field of hard disk structure modification so 1 just to be on the safe side please make a backup of your data before carrying out any operation The first component that will be displayed is called the Express Launcher Thanks to a well thought out categorization and hint system it provides quick and easy access to wizards and utilities that we consider worth using on a regular basis With its help you can also start up the traditional launcher the help system or go to the program s home page Paragon Hard Disk Manager 14 Suite o p Paragon Hard Disk Manager gt w Backup Log Saver User Manual HARD DISK MANAGER 14 SWITCH TO FULL SCALE LAUNCHER Migrate OS Create Partition Format Partition P 2V Adjust Trans 5 Wipe Data Del ete Partition To know more on how to handle the product s interface and accomp
158. e size in Mb of the copied partition Free space before Define the position in Mb of the copied partition relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Oo The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing partition oO To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Boot Management Our program enables to easily manage several operating systems on one computer with the help of the Boot Manager Setup Wizard Among the key features of the wizard the following should be mentioned e Upto 16 operating systems on one PC e Secure adding removing of the Boot Manager startup
159. e the object s The File Transfer Wizard allows copying data to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned or burning them to CD DVDs Choose the way the data will be stored There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the data f Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD e Revision of changes The Transfer Summary page provides structurally divided information on all the actions made in the wizard Check the changes and come back to any step of the wizard if necessary by following the required hyperlink Please overview the transher options You can return to the corresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transfer Object s selected 1 Total data size 1 GB 1 076 198 272 Bytes Transter destination Destination path Bea Space available on destination 485 9 GB 521 742 041 086 Bytes Overwrite existing files No Result After the operation is completed the required data will be placed into the specified destination Available operation scenarios e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Mount Partition The program enables to assign or remove drive let
160. ease select new file system Please enter new volume label New Volume w More options No e File system From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available W Use 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster a Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 76 Oo Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition formatted to the specified file system Deleting Partitions Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel
161. eate the backup capsule only as the last Oo primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems 4 Activate the bootable recovery environment if needed With its help you will get the choice to boot directly from the backup capsule for maintenance or recovery purposes every time you start up the computer If you re attempting to embed our bootable environment to a GPT disk just our case you will be prompted to provide a path to an ISO image of the WinPE recovery environment which can be prepared either with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder available in the My Account section www paragon software com my account If you have to do with an MBR disk no preliminary actions are required as in this case there will be used a Linux based image which is included to the product by default fe Allow to start recovery system from backup capsule Bootable backup capsule on selected GPT hard disk can be based on WinPE ACD only Please buid WinPE ACD ISO file either with the Boot Media Builder add on or Recover Media Builder add on supplied with your product and specify its locations C AUsers Administrator s Desktop dest iso Browse Time to display the backup capsule startup message 5 seconds Startup message preview Paragon Backup Capsu
162. ect Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to burn CD DVD discs Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 165 Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA Ext4FS 1o0n Disk 1 NEWYVOLUME P Fi My computer i Root dir i iMyComputer My computer Ka imnt Mounted resources i imntdisk Local disks Ka imedia Removable disks gs IDE CD DVD NECVMWa VMware IDE lt 2 CA EXAFS 1 on Disk 1 NEW VOLUI a NTFS 0 on Disk 0 UFSOLtis a NTFS 1 on DiskO UFSD disk ET a mz rasrlethils ru E gt ai gt ira 6 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 MWindows System HDDO Part1 Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech oo System 3 Systems2 3 SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks Temp oo ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename F6 Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 7 Onthe Select Destination Type choose the way the da
163. ee alee Flags gs Increment Differential BOOTNT 1 By iome i BOOTSECT BAK 5 B 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 750 I BShow VD containers E Show partitions amp B B Ek Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Comment Mounted amp 10 17 2013 31208 AM New Volume 5 3 GE IMB 3 Increment 1 Chain 2 E 107 1772013 3 08 48 AM Local Disk 44 1 GE 279M6 0 3 Increment 2 amp 10 17 2013 2 02 14 AM Local Disk 44 1 GE 279MB g 3 Increment 1 amp 10716 2013 8 41 21 PM Recovery 22r MB 47GB Backup image 20131015 1639 E 10 16 2013 8 41 21 PM New Volume F3 GE 47GB EE Backup_image_20131015_1639 amp 10 16 2073 8 41 21 PM Local Disk 44 1 GB 47GB Backup_image_20131015 1639 E gt 10 16 2013 8 41 21 PM NO MAME 100 ME 47GB al Backup_image_20131015_1639 E gt 107 1672013 8 41 21 PM Local Disk 128 ME 47GB ai Backup_image_20131015_ 1639 1 Properties Panel that displays properties of the selected image 2 Volume Explorer that enables to access the selected image as a regular folder to explorer its contents or to retrieve certain files 3 Archive List that displays a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Besides the program provides all the necessary functionality to manage backup images in the database add delete mount refresh etc Oo All panels offer a synchronized layout and are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the use
164. ee eee eee e tee e eee et eee terete etter tere etter rere rete teeter errr etter eee rere etree eet rete e errr reer eee reer etree ere eter rere tert ttt te Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Cther Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 On the next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size H Ei My Computer hy Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes po dee SiMaster Boot Record MBER 0 Bytes SI Local Disk Primary NTFS 350 MB 2 Bo W Local Disk C Primary NTFS 250 3 GB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes 2 fe Master Boot Record MER 0 Buttes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Di
165. elcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 149 4 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image e Mapa network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Specity a YD Container to restore Remote location mapping A network share E Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection No archive selected Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to It Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Oo You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image If you need more information on the selected backup object please click the corresponding link at the bottom of the section Click Next to proceed Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 150 Specity a YD Container to restore Look tr E Network Storage server spool 2 E N F Hame Size Date inci 1072972013 8 15 03 AM 7 m mc _1_0 3 1072972013 8 18 17 AM ad iInc_2 12 107
166. eliable sectors it will mark them as unusable ones e Copy data and resize partitions proportionally If this option is activated the program proportionally changes the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when restoring to a larger hard disk e Perform surface test Define whether the surface test will be accomplished during the operation or not e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 63 a ace new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive Oo The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result The wizard will restore the archived data and make it available to use in the operating system To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule e Restoring a system partition from external media CD
167. emote location mapping Pa Local Dis A network share a Ef Network Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection ren Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_031 013135006539 Estimated archive size 55 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another network drive needs to be selected 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Ry No commen 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process For pVHD images 1 Click the New Backup Format tab on the Rib
168. ened dialog window you can see two tabs General and Schedule Click the General tab to modify Full path to the macro command program interpreter which describes the scheduled task Command line for starting the interpreter i e the task described in macro language e Comments referring to the task e The option of enabling disabling the task By clicking the Schedule tab you can modify the task timetable In order to apply the changes you need to click the Apply button at the foot of the dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 97 Creating a Scheduled Task You can set a timetable for execution of any operation For backup and copy operations the program offers handy wizards while all the others can be scheduled with the Save to Scheduler dialog To create a scheduled task you should take the following steps 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to schedule 3 Call the Save to Scheduler dialog by clicking its icon on the Virtual Operations Bar l Schedule virtual operations All virtual operations you have made will be sawed to the scheduler Wo operations will be Task name Scheduled Task Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task W Do not reboot if itis required Shutdown system after carving out the tasks Start the task ort 1001 3201344 at 12 00 AM Every 1 a day s Do not run
169. ent to a full file backup Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 58 Restoring System and Data The program includes a convenient and reliable restore wizard With its help you can restore all types of backup images created with the program It provides easy to understand instructions to configure and perform all the necessary settings Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the restore operation e A backup image to be restored The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show al amp be Ee 1071072013 7 78 58 4M File level Archive 1071072013 2 78 24 AM File level Archive 107 1072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 107 1072013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey 1071072013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 1071072013 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 1071072013 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 1071
170. ep to get the most out of the system Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 205 Advance scenario specifics 1 To launch the advance mode select Set parameters for the OS adjustment J Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically Perfor the OS adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers Set parameters for the OS adjustment i Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers Parameters and inject diverse _ 2 When setting additional driver repositories you can specify how to process drivers for found hardware Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers Ta Inject all necessary drivers from the specified driver repository Keep the latest driver version e Inject all necessary drivers Mark the checkbox to force injection of all drivers for your devices from the given driver repository s even if there are already installed drivers for some hardware Please use this option if you suspect any of the installed drivers of not matching your hardware e Keep the latest driver version Mark the checkbox to keep the latest version of drivers during the forced re injection You can use this option only when the above option is active 3 Just before the OS adjustment you can additionally e View all found hardware devices and their driver status by c
171. epresented as a traditional Internet host name e g mail com or as an IP numeric address e g XXX XXX XXX XX e User e mail address Specify an e mail address that has been assigned by the Internet Service Provider or organization s e mail administrator e My outgoing server requires authentication Activate the option to allow the program to make authentication on the server before sending messages User name Enter the name that will be used to log in to the e mail account Password Enter the password that will be used to access the mail server When you re ready with the settings click on the Send test e mail button to check if everything is OK Virtual Mode Options 6 Virtual mode options Operations mode lf Allow virtual mode Set this option on to carry out all the operations virtually ou will be able to commit the changes or rollback all of them or the last one IF you switch this option off the operations Will be carted out immediately Close progress dialog automatically Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the changes In this section you may configure the virtual mode e Allow virtual mode Mark the checkbox to enable the virtual mode It is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operation will be executed until confirmation thus giving you a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation Copyright 1994 2013 P
172. er move exact as it was but will require more time e e 12 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 13 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent logical partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Redistribute Free Space Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a volume you want to expand i e the system one Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 180 Choose a volume to expand Basic MBA
173. eration Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 162 6 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Unallocated Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 46041 11 MB 95684 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 53642 MB Please specify size of free space after the partitions 53642 H OMB 53642 MB 7 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 8 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and copy it to another hard disk when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Connect the second hard disk to the computer 2 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recove
174. eration will be performed immediately after confirmation Oo The program can only convert basic MBR disks Updating MBR The program enables to overwrite the current bootable code in the MBR Master Boot Record by the standard bootstrap code This can help to repair a corrupted bootable code of a hard disk resulted from a boot virus attack or a malfunction of boot management software In order to update MBR of a hard disk you should take the following steps 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Update MBR Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 91 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Are you sure you want to Update master boot record Current MBAR contents for hard disk number O will be lost after this operation our computer may no longer boot correctly 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Wipe Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to wipe a hard disk partition of any file system or only destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data thus providing high level of security The operation can be accomplished with the Wipe Wizard or corresponding dialogs Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon
175. ers Please note however that due to certain limitations of the network bandwidth the use of FTP SFTP locations for storing many GBs of data OS together with all on disk data isn t the best choice but it s great for personal data like your documents email databases photos etc So let s see how to back up all office documents of the My Documents folder to an SFTP server 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page select Documents to protect all office documents inside the My Documents folder Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 120 je Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E rriaill Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats Scated In the My Documents folder eRe EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee reer e reer e eee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee rere eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eet e Other Files and Folders Select files and fold
176. ers Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected asic Hard Disk 0 Ba 500 GB VMware Virtual N Type Actve File System 0 1 2 Volume label Size Drive letters Primary System Rese 350 MB lt None gt Primary NTFS No label 478 GB E Primary Free 21 9 GB lt None gt Properties Edit letters 9 Click the Edit Letters button to correct an existing drive letter or assign a new one in the Windows System Registry Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected asic Hard DiskO Primary Letters Primary Ba N Type Active 0 1 2 Primary Change Release Properties Edit letters 10 Once you ve assigned the appropriate drive letter close the dialog then click the Apply button 11 Confirm the operation A 3 pending operations Apply changes Yes No Details 12 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All right
177. ers to back up 4 Onthe next page choose FTP Servers as backup storage Look in E Local Disk C a lel 4 F F Local Disk C E Local Disk F New Yolune G ib pool Siservere 12 D p o pool S servere 2 be lp SF Physical partitions Fy System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Prirar MHTFS EH Network places mj Network FTP Servers Archive name Jaret 01013094249110 5 Click on the Create an FPT Location button to set up parameters for the required SFTP location Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location ftp et i a im X Mame l Size Date Create FI PSFIF location Use SFTP connection Address Jidhive strato com Fort a Anonymous login Use Active Mode Login tid Password ica W Save password Mame STRATO Hib rive Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server E Archive details Address Type in its address Port Specify the required port 22 by default Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 121 Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymous connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous Allow Open SSH key based authentication If your SFTP provider requires this type of authentication ma
178. ess any problems that might occur while managing the program can be tackled by reading this very chapter General Layout When you start the program the first component that is displayed is called the Launcher It enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration The Launcher s window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 33 Backup 4 Restore New Backup Format Partitioning Copy Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer Sor ame o o NA 2N ool Dutton Create File Create Incremental Manage Check Archive Ribbon Panel r Complement File Archive Capsule Integrity Backup Restore Advanced backup Backup utilities Apply Discard View Changes Undo Redo amp Reload Disk Into Cc Save to Scheduler g Express Mode Disk map Virtual Operations Bar Express Mode Button Basic MER Hard Disk 0 VMware YH ware i System Reserved i Local Disk C 350 MB NTFS 499 6 GB NTFS Undelete Partitions Wipe Partition Test Surface E dit Wiew Sectors Context sensitive Menu Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk DevJ Disk Map Unallocated 499 9 GE Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 Mware YHware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Properties Unalloc
179. ess to some of its software You don t want to waste time re installing the old software to the new system and you do know for sure that the bulk of it won t work anyway The best way out is to virtualize your old system But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e Your hard disk has enough free space to store a virtual image of your Windows depends on the system e You ve got one of the supported virtualization software To make a virtual disk out of your current system please do the following 1 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select P2V Copy i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select objects you need to virtualize You re allowed to select any combination of hard disks and partitions but don t forget to choose your system partition Local Disk C in our case to use it as guest Otherwise the resulted virtual machine won t start up Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 209 Please specify what volumes or entire hard disks including connected virtual disks you d like to add ta your virtual machine Name Type E H My Computer My Computer m Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris E Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vir
180. estination disk if there are more than two drives besides the source Please select target disk The wizard is going to copy To Microsoft Windows 6 1 on Local Disk 0 3 NTFS 224 7 GB 19 2 GB used To the one of the Following disks ic Diski model VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew 500 GE A The disk contains 2 partitions they will be deleted during 25 migration fy Disk 2 model YMware YMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10 GB 7 Ifthe selected disk is not enough in capacity to hold your OS just our case or you d like to remove redundant data from the process click on the corresponding link to additionally exclude files from the system partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 198 Cannot copy OS to target disk The wizard is going to copy c Microsoft Windows 6 1 64 bit Edition on Local Disk 0 3 NTFS 499 4 GB 10 6 GB used To Disk 1 model VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCST Disk Dey 10 GB Ab Unfortunately the capacity of your hard disk doesn t allow to copy the entire Local Disk iC partition The Wizard can copy the system leaving aside some programs or data Please select what cin should be copied Use all available space for the partition with OS Use this option to expand the partition with 5 so it will use all available space on the disk This option is recommended if you are not going to create other partitions on the hard disk you re migrating to
181. etup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the transfer operation e Place to look for files directories Select a source disk from the pull down list in the left pane of the page The program enables to process both mounted and unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Besides it is possible to map a network drive Source Bian rl axe g Local Disk L a DVD RW Drive D PARAG E New Volume E Local Disk F NEW VOLUME G Physical partitions w System Reserved Disk 0 p w NEW VOLUME Disk 2 par E Network places E Network e Object s of operation Choose files directories you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the Add button To delete a file directory from the Clipboard select it in the Clipboard pane and press the Remove button You can also create a new folder rename or irreversibly delete existing files directories of the left pane by pressing the appropriate buttons Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 101 Clipboard Source Bata MX g images F irnaqes Hame BOOTNXT 2 gt 5 config sys 2 gt 5 pagetile sys b ba 5 swaptile sys DVD Rw Brive 0 PARAGON F New Volume E F Local Disk F di System Volume Information Total data size 1 GB Oo Files directories deleted from the Clipboard remain intact on source disks e Destination to stor
182. ew partition Please don t touch system yy lt files folders like Windows Users Program Files config sys etc By clicking the Next button the wizard starts calculating the amount of data to move which may take some time Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 182 Mame Size Dake a di Program Files 10 9 2015 5 50 43 AM E L Program Files 86 10 9 2013 11 01 16 PM Users 9 32013 2 48 22 PM a di Administrator 1079 2013 10 26 37 PM Public ai22 2013 6 36 32 AM L a Ji User 9 3 2013 10 45 59 AM 4 E di Contacts gaz0la 10 45 56 4M E di Desktop gaz0la 10 45 56 4M Documents 9 3 2013 10 45 59 AM Downloads 9 3 2013 10 45 59 AM f Favorites 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM f Links 9j3 2013 10 46 00 AM a Music 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM H ictures 9 32013 10 45 56 AM ici a Saved Games of3 2013 10 45 59 AM E di Searches gazla 2 40 10 PM Videos 9 3 2013 10 45 56 AM Lp Windows 10 9 2013 11 01 29 PM addins ai22 2013 6 36 36 AM di ADFS ai22 2013 6 36 31 AM 6 Redistribute free space between the partitions by moving the slider or manually by entering the required value for the new partition in the corresponding field Then choose a drive letter for this partition from the pull down list that contains vacant letters if necessary by default the wizard selects the first vacant one Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware YHware Yirtu
183. f media Removable disks IDE CD DYD NECVMWa VMware IDE s C Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEW VOLU reerizinis Fa Nelete Fa 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 MWindews System HDDO Part1 Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech 3 System Systems2 oo SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks G Temp G ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename FG Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD BD Choose this option ff you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select a hard disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 164 Select path mntidisk sdb Space available on destination 321 MB Total da
184. fault the wizard scans all your local disks for available free space and picks the most appropriate location taking into account the total capacity of all virtual disks inside the virtual machine File name for the virtual disk G New VMware virtual hard disk A The virtual disk will take about 10 5 GB on PARAGON G The selected volume has only 3 4G6 of free space and cannot hold the virtual disk file Help me to find an appropriate place for the disk 8 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Hard Disk Utilization To irreversibly destroy all on disk information without any possibility to recover and that way providing the maximum level of security please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Wipe Disk or Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a hard disk the data of which you want to wipe out Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 212 Please choose an object for wiping It can be a whole hard disk a single partition or a block of unallocated space you can set to wipe all data on the partition or only unoccupied space on it see the next step Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l E Local Disk C g data 2 224 7 GE NTF
185. g copy and sector based backup operations You can filter certain files or folders either by the manual selection or by creating masks what is more preferable Thus you will be able to effectively manage contents of your backup images or partition hard disk copies By default there are no available filters To create a filter please click the Add Category button E Filter Browse Description A You can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards in path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 47 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the General Copy and Backup Options File Backup Exclude Options oe 5 Exclude from file backup archives Specity masks for files and folders that must be excluded from archives Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename categ
186. h high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements e Paragon Adaptive Restore technology to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P e Paragon Power Shield technology to provide data consistency in case of a hardware malfunction power outages or an operating system failure Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 13 e Paragon UFSD technology to browse partitions of any file system including hidden and unmounted modify and copy files and folders etc e Paragon Hot Resize technology to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work e Paragon Restore with Shrink technology to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Paragon Smart Partition technology to securely perform hard disk partitioning operations of any complexity e Paragon BTE technology to set tasks for execution during the system restart thus saving from the need to use a bootable media when modifying system partitions e Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy
187. he name of your guest OS which can be modified however e CPU number If your computer supports multiprocessing select how many CPUs you d like to allocate for the virtual machine e Memory amount Depending on the guest OS the wizard calculates the recommended size of RAM which can be modified however Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 210 Virtual machine version Oracle VirtualBox 4 Virtual machine name Windows 7 PC CPU number 1 Memory amount 1024 MB Minimum memory size Recommended memory size FN Maximum mi mony size if taken more you could face extensive swapping 6 Set properties of the resulted virtual disk s e Virtual disk interface By default the wizard sets the most appropriate interface for each disk Anyway you ve got the option to change it to one of the supported by your guest OS Just click on a disk and then select the required interface from the pull down list But be ready to provide drivers for it on the next page Virtual disk info Interface a lan ee ere ey ee ete ee C5 Buslogic IDE SCS BusLogic C Users user Downloads wmscsi 1 2 0 4 flp Windows 7 has been found on the source partition and the disk controller type has been set to SCS BusLogic Please provide a path to an iso or flp image that contains a driver for the selected disk controller D Our program supports injection of drivers delivered in iso or flp images
188. he program supports previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual mode of execution In fact when the virtual mode is enabled the program does not accomplish operations immediately but places them on the List of Pending Operations for later execution The Virtual Operations Bar enables to manage pending operations BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Cancel the last virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Display the List of Pending Operations Launch the real execution of virtual operations Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Generate a script out of all pending operations Schedule pending operations Virtual mode is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operations will be executed until clicking the Apply button for confirmation thus giving a second chance to oO weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation The program politely reminds the user that there are unsaved changes by showing the following window EN You hawe unsaved changes Express Mode Button By clicking on this button the user can switch to the express mode of operation at any time Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 35 Disk Map As the name infers the Disk Map displays the layout of physical and logical disks Physical disks are represente
189. he selected hard disk contains blocks of free space the wizard will automatically merge them all and allocate the resulted space to create the partition If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition thus resizing it You can select ether a block of unallocated space of the disk or an edsting partition unused space of which w D servec to create a new partion Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev g Vista C 9 Unallocated 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2 GB i New volume current size is 341 2 GB Min Volume Size 0 Bytes Max Volume Size 241 2GB 5 The next page enables to specify a file system and a number of additional parameters Since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue Yas want to fonnat the partition Partition type NTFS r Assign the followang drive letter E Surface test level None Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 190 Oo On this page you can specify a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 6 Enter a label for the future partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels wil be displayed in the Boot Manager s startup menu to help you boot the required operating system CS labe Vitindows xF 7 The program w
190. if you use this option drives that smaller in size than the source disk will be unavailable to use as destination e The target hard disk Select a hard disk if several where all data of the source disk will be copied to Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Fp Backup Capsule i i New Volume H a 312 7 GB NTFS 437 2 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr i Unallocated 119 n Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dew d 40 e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Result 65 Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options HOD raw copy Partitions raw copy Ferom incremental copy Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkboe to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager for destination hard drive Copy options HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused
191. ill carry out all the necessary operations and then automatically restart the computer to initiate the installation process If you ve changed your mind on installing a new operating system don t insert its distributive CD but press ESC when the following message appears Insert distributive CD DVD and press any key to continue or Esc to abort the action Please wake sure your BIOS is set up to boot from CD DVD All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 8 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Windows AP Professional Setup The Following list shows the existing partitions and uUnpAaArtitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list To get up Windows AP on the selected item press ENTER To create a partition in the unpartitioned space press C To delete the selected
192. imple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the system backup is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Look in arc_091013131559760 vw D 3 arc_101013062156703 hiw arc_091013131559760 pbt Rename FG New folder FT Delete F8 6 Double click on the required backup to open Source i NTFS 1 on Disk 0 UFSD disk 9 arc_101013091536750 arc_101013091716250 O Documents and Settings 9 Partition oO 2 C PerlLogs 3 Program Files Cd Program Files x86 3 ProgramData 9 System Volume Information oo Users 3 Windows 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source Window s 9 Mindows System HDDO Part1 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech 3 System oo Systems2 oo SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Tasks fo Temp co ToastData 9 tracing Total data size 30 3 KB Rename FG Delete F8 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 168 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to
193. ing incremental chains data de duplication and synchronization pVHD allows obtaining backups that are up to four times smaller than original backup objects What you get by using pVHD Incremental imaging works much faster and rock stable in comparison with the old PBF Only pVHD images can be used to do immediate virtualization With the new backup technology Paragon has also achieved easy support of any virtual containers VMDK VHD etc In the current version the pVHD support has a promotional goal In future releases pVHD will gradually take the primary role e Copy Restore to dissimilar sector size Previously not allowed now you can for instance copy or restore contents of a 512 byte hard disk to a 4k hard disk with no additional actions from your side e New UIM Universal Image Mounter Apart from PBF images Universal Image Mounter enables to mount assign a drive letter to pVHD backup images full and incremental to browse their contents and retrieve data both in the program and directly under Windows OS e GPT uEFI compatible Backup Capsule Paragon s bootable backup capsule is compatible with 64 bit Windows systems resided on GPT volumes If having to do with this type of configuration by selecting one additional option in the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard you can build a WinPE based bootable backup capsule to successfully start up PC from it in case of emergency To accomplish this action you will need to provi
194. ing the appropriate buttons Edit the Boot ini file on Hard Disk 0 Partition 0 boot loader timeout 30 default multi Mdisk O rdisk O partition lWwiNDOWS operating systems multiMdiskiMrdiskiM panition UWINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute Copy Irizari Arle Delete Edit Insert the sample Add the sample 7 Ifthe Boot ini file does not contain any mistake please return to the Correct Windows Installations page to correct drive letters in the Windows System Registry Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refers to a system partition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry MN Partition Status Root System 1 DiskO PartitionO S B WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties Correct drive letters in the System Registry Edit the Boot ini file Correct partition boot record Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 139 8 On the next page choose a hard disk from the pull down list if several then the required partition If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Partitions List Lett
195. ion Archive path farc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Created 2013 Oct 9 Wed 12 52 57 File system NTFS Drive letter 7 Volume label Size capacity 500 GB 536 501 813 248 Bytes Used space 10 5 GB 290 Free space 489 GB 98 Sectors Cluster B Di rban momar m mmia r CA i iA kai Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 144 8 Onthe next page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your wW computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB a OO Basic Hard Disk 0 Model YMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Volume label Active Hidden oO Primary 350 MB System Resen Yes Mo 1 Primary NTFS 280 GB No label No No All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 9 Onthe Partition Start and Size page you can change size of the partition and its location if necessary Partition preview NTFS New size 10263 511649 MB wy 511649 MB Free space before 0 501386 MB Free space after 0 501386 MB 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk 0 Your disk before
196. ion position in Mb relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Sector to sector move Mark the checkbox to move the partition in the sector by sector mode to process its unused space as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available Oo When resizing a FAT16 partition beyond the 2GB limit maximum file system size the partition will automatically be converted to FAT32 The program enables to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work providing 100 percent guarantee that your data is kept intact 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other e Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Converting File System With our program you can change type of the used file system without destroying its data While performing the operation it first checks the current file system for c
197. ions Backup Facilities Archive Database to help the user easily manage backup images get properties add delete mount etc Oo This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program Available location for backup images Backup to local mounted partitions Backup to local unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Backup to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence Backup to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system Backup to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure Backup to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Backup to an FTP SFTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Bootable Backup Capsule to get the choice to launch the Linux or PTS DOS recovery environment every time you start up the computer With its help you will be able to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon
198. ions or blocks of free space on the list are sorted according to their starting position For every item there is the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 36 Disk and partitions list z Name File svstem Yolurme size Partition size Used Free Volume label Hidden Ac Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dev n00 GB E System Reserved NTFS 350 ME 350 MBE 256 8 MB 931MB System Reserved No Ki 499 6 GE 11 7 GE 487 9 0B Mo label G Local Disk C NTFS B Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 vMware YMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev J 495 6 GE 6 Unallocated Back Up Hard Disk 499 9GB No label Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Burn Hard Disk on CD DVD or BD GS Unallocated H E Bytes 749 9 GB No label No Me Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dev Unallocated Restore Hard Disk Bytes 119 9GB No label No Ne Update MIER Convert to GPT hard disk TI Undelete Partitions Wipe Hard Disk EditWiew Sectors Properties The Disk and Partitions List provides detailed information on all hard disks and partitions found in the system including the following properties Name Volume label if exists Drive letter File system type Volume size Amount of used and unused f
199. is the latest trend in the system migration protection and evaluation Boot Management Facilities e Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating systems on one computer Partition Hard Disk Management Facilities e Basic functions for initializing partitioning and formatting hard disks create format delete Instead of the standard Windows disk tools the program supports all popular file systems e Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most appropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter e Split Partition Wizard helps you separate OS and data or different types of data by splitting one partition to two different partitions of the same type and file system e Merge Partitions Wizard to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions NTFS FAT16 FAT32 into a single larger partition e Redistribute Free Space Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions e Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp e NTFS hot resize upward to enlarge an NTFS partition system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work e Convert a file system FAT16 32 NTFS
200. it processor It can meet the requirements of almost any end user However that is not the case when dealing with servers processing large amounts of data with complex calculations of very large numbers That is where 64 bit architecture comes into play It can boast improved scalability for business applications that enables to support more customer databases and more simultaneous users on each server Besides a 64 bit kernel can access more system resources such as memory allocation per user A 64 bit processor can handle over 4 billion times more memory addresses than a 32 bit processor With these resources even a very large database can be cached in memory Although many business applications run without problems on 32 bit systems others have grown so complex that they use up the 4 GB memory limitation of a 32 bit address space With this large amount of data fewer memory resources are available to meet memory needs On a 64 bit server most queries are able to perform in the buffers available to the database Some 32 bit applications make the transition to the 64 bit environment seamlessly others do not For instance system level utilities and programs that provide direct hardware access are likely to fail Our program offers a full fledged support of the 64 bit architecture providing fault tolerant work for such system dependent modules as Hot Processing Copy Operations Hard drive duplication nowadays is becoming highly popular among PC
201. ivate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 73 W Use 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster ro Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the option to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Oo Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Available operation scenarios e Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Formatting Partitions Any partition should contain some file system to be used for keeping data The process of installing a file system is commonly known as formatting A huge variety of file systems have been developed these days Supported File Systems The program provides the ability to format partitions of the following file systems FAT12 amp FAT16 FAT32 HFS NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Linux Swap v 2 Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Format Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview
202. ization With new powerful x86 computers system virtualization has become extremely popular It s a software technology that enables to run several virtual machines on one physical machine providing resources of that single computer are shared across several environments As a result one and the same physical computer can have multiple OSs and applications operating simultaneously thus opening up enormous opportunities for both business and home users exactly e Avoid underutilization of up to date powerful computers e Increase flexibility of a physical infrastructure e Provide for increased availability of hardware and applications e Cut expenses on hardware and energy e Guarantee smooth and cost saving system migration e Enjoy working with old applications you can t launch on your current PC e Take advantage of having multiple operating systems on one Windows PC including Linux Mac OS X etc e Forget about hunting for replacement of the failed hardware and many more Known Issues 1 You should install integration services e g VMware Tools on the virtual system yourself We only guarantee its smooth startup 2 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to a virtual disk you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 3 If your syste
203. ject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Modifying drive letter of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating 1 system After having processed partitions with installed software some programs may not run properly Mount Archive The program provides the ability to assign a drive letter to a partition backup image As a result of the operation you will get a new read only partition in the system to easily browse through its contents and copy the required information even with the standard Windows tools Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 103 Assign Drive Letter Before you start mounting backup images please study the following limitations e Archives can be mounted at the partition level only thus please use the Show partitions option to view all partitions inside backup images e Archives will only be mounted for the current session and won t be available after the system restart e Archives containing Windows Storage Spaces are not supported e Archives containing ReFS partitions are not supported e pVHD archives located on physical unmounted partitions or in the backup capsule cannot be mounted e pVHD encrypted archives are not supported e pVHDLVM LDM archives are not supported In order to mount an archive you should take the following steps 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Calla context menu for the
204. k 1 Size 500 GB oo Primary Free 500 GB No 5 Choose your system partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 186 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB E NTFS Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CD DVD BD Restore Partition Basic Hard Disk 1 Vv NTFS New Volu Copy Partition Copy Partition by Files Format Partition Delete Partition Basic Hard Disk 2 Convert File 43 Unmount Wipe Partition Basic Hard Disk 0 e 500 GB Clear Free Space l i E l N Volume Type Free volume label Active Hidden i z Basic Hard DiskO S Modify oO Prima 93 1 MBE System Resen No Mo 1 E Primar Check File System Integrity 3 219GB No label No No 2 Prima Dump File System 212 GB BC Yes Yes Test Surface Edit View Sectors Fa Ctrl F4 Alt Enter Browse Partition Properties 6 Inthe opened dialog set a new size for the partition by moving the slider or by entering the exact value in the appropriate field While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green Click OK to continue Partition preview E
205. l be recorded up to the end no matter how much actual information to contain e Recording speed The user may define how fast a CD DVD BD will be recorded minimum normal and maximum Besides there is an automatic mode when the program will set the most appropriate speed for every CD DVD BD e Bootable ISO image That s the image to be placed together with the backup data By default the program offers its own bootable ISO image which contains a Linux DOS recovery environment However the user is free to use any bootable ISO image e CD DVD BD boot capability The program enables to choose whether any recorded CD DVD BD will be bootable or only the first one for a session or without that function at all e Folder where the ISO image is to be placed When the user decides not to physically burn a CD DVD BD but create an ISO image file this very folder will be used to contain these images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 42 Hot Processing Options A Hot processing options W Enable hot processing Hot processing technology Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service is a reliable technology designed to back up volumes being locked by numerous active transactions of 55 supporting applications Micrasoft 55 technology requires over 300 MB of free space on any mounted NTFS volume for temporary data This technology i provided for Windows SF and newes
206. le f Do not allow to stark recovery system from backup capsule Creation of the bootable backup capsule on an MBR disk will result in overwriting MBR thus in case of having a third side boot manager it will be removed The backup capsule can only be bootable if it is located on the bootable device Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 110 5 Preview the resulted hard disk layout and change size of the backup capsule if necessary by moving the corresponding slider or manually entering the required value It will be created at the expense of free space of the selected disk four hard disk before creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i o Local Disk C 499 4 GB NTFS Tour hard disk after creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l p Local Disk C Backup Capsule 255 3 GB NTFS 243 8 GB Backup capsule curent size it 244 1 GB Min capsule size 340 MB E 25001 3 MB Max capsule size 488 3 GB There is no restriction on the size of the backup capsule merely depending on the available space of the hard disk and the capacity needed for the backup If the wizard cannot find enough free space in one block it will redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions if necessary If the total amount of free spa
207. le level Archive 71 9 ME 1071072013 2 17 49 AM New Volume G 14 2 GB 1071072013 21719 AM New Volume G 14 2 GB 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GB z 1079 2013 11 24 19 PM File level Archive 24 KB 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 1079 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 309 Bytes 49 KB 165 5 MB 1079 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 1079 2013 7 08 28 AM NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME 1079 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk a ME 30 8 KE 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM Mew Wolume E 10 9 GE 4 7 ME AO OD Oo d p F G G z p F p p E G z Pa Switch to File view Archive File Details 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Archive size 389 Bytes Total size Backup date 10 10 2073 6 55 43 4M Comment Mo comment is available File C farnc_09701737 4067 75574 farchive phi Base archive 087 7551 arc_101701 3060839749 F LOOOO00000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description 0 To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 159 Look in E Lo
208. leted close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 169 13 Turn off the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Restoring separate files and folders from a backup The program provides a very convenient option to access backup archives and restore only data you need the so called selective restore functionality Restore Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the Restore Wizard 3 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Look irr Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 im g Mame F ES Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 E are_091013125156058 H E DIFF13025859001 0000000 E DIFF1 3025959447 0000000 are_09101 3125156059 pbt are_09101 3125156058 pfi 2 are_091013125156059 pim S E are_111013111635639 B arc_111013111635639 pbf are_111013111635639 pfi are_111013111635639_0200p 000 are_111013111635639_0200p
209. licking The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanumeric code which is very convenient So you can compare the listed devices with the given hardware to make sure the wizard has analyzed your system correctly Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 206 8 Intel R 82 how already supported hardware Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Driver is already installed e Filter devices without drivers by clicking Unlike the automatic mode where only boot critical devices storage controllers without drivers are being reported here you can view and inject drivers for network cards as well x a 8 Intej 20ly show devices without drivers Show all devices Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device E SG Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 LS Adapter SAS 3000 series 3 port with 1068 Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device e Add a driver for each device that lacks it by clicking on the device then browsing for the
210. lish typical operations please consult the chapter WinPE and or Linux based recovery environments should be prepared on site with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder which you can download from Paragon s web site the My Account section To know more on the subject please consult documentation that comes with these utilities Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 17 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media The Linux DOS recovery environment can be used to boot your computer into Linux or PTS DOS to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes It also has the PTS DOS safe mode which may help in a number of non Standard situations such as interfering hardware settings or serious problems on the hardware level In this case only basic files and drivers such as hard disk drivers a monitor driver and a keyboard driver will be loaded Startup To start working with the Linux DOS recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here Oo Wwww paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch a boot mode you need
211. ll parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Please overview the transter options You can return to the corresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transter Object s selected 1 Total data size T E GB 6 248 732 6358 Bytes Transter destination Destination path C4 Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 596 853 760 Bytes Overwrite existing files No 6 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Volume Explorer To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with Volume Explorer please do the following 1 Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel B Backup Restore Mew Backup Format Partitioning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer amp Refresh volumes information Volume Explorer Apply Discard View Changes Unda Reda Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Scheduler GF E pre Of Drives 2 A Hard Disks He L1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 500 GB E 2 YMware VMware Yitual 5 SCSI Disk Device 499 9 GB 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Device 750 GB E 4 YMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GB Af Virtual Drives 2 Browse for the required archive and then open it by double click of the left mouse button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 173 Name
212. ll rights reserved 155 Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 767999 10263 MB 767999 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OME Please specify size of free space after the partition U OMB 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 7 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 8 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Let s assume that your Mac fails to boot because of a hard disk malfunction But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on an external USB drive Just replace the failed disk with a new one and carry out a bare metal restore To restore a dual boot Mac from a backup image located on an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare
213. m e New cluster size Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance In a nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it The cluster size value is expressed in sectors per cluster To get it in Kbytes please divide it into half You may only decrease the current cluster size e Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 88 Making Logical Primary The program allows you to include a primary partition in the extended partition or exclude a logical partition from the extended partition without partition duplication In order to change a partition type you should take the following steps 1 Select a primary or logical partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Make Partition Logical Primary There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject sT Are you sure you want to make the partition logical You are about to make the partition C No label NTF
214. m To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar 9 If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that you have the merged volume now Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Let s assume you ve got two partitions on your hard disk the first one takes about 40 of all the disk space and is exclusively used for Vista 64 bit while the second servers as a data storage One day you realize that your system partition doesn t need so much disk space that s what your data partition really requires at the moment You can easily tackle this problem with Paragon Linux DOS recovery environment To increase size of a data partition by taking unused space from a system partition please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 185 Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www
215. m Partition ccccccccccsescccsecccenececeecsceneceeenseseeeseseeeceseuecseeueceeensss 166 Restoring separate files and folders from a DACKUP ccccessccccessecccceseccccesccecaesececsusececeeusecessuecessugeceeseneceseusecesseneceesenes 169 RESIZE SCONOUIOS sai aeiscseguces cies aciesnitestazsrnaabiecsuaet E a a 174 Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data cccccccsecccesecccesececenseseesceceeeceseuecseeneseeensss 174 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space Of an adjacent partition ccccccceccccsecsceeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeees 175 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused Space from ANY OTHE cccccceeeccceeeseceeceeeecseeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeeees 176 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent logical partition ccccecccceseseeeeeseeeeeeees 179 separatie OS MOM Medid datarea ited ea eadaeeeecde AE eee ea 180 Merging a system partition with an adjacent logical Partition cccccccsssccccesseccceeseccceensecesseececeeeecessensccesseseceeseneceeeeees 183 Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition seesssssseessrrrssrreresrreresreresrrerssreressrerssreresererssrereserersseeee 184 Resizing partitions Of ADple Boot CaM roncin E eo a ee 187 Creatine Dual BOOtSYStEMS ciiirt a dessa E A T euatieehessesecdaeeae E 189 Windows ViSta WINDOWS XP pirri nea e i E E O aA wdaaetnevaneens
216. m hosts several Windows OSes our program will find them all and automatically patch to run ina virtual environment However we cannot guarantee smooth startup of all found Windows systems but the guest OS for its configuration parameters may be incompatible with the others Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy Service Offline versus Online Data Processing In the course of time there have been developed various methods of data processing Despite different work concept all of them can be divided into two principal groups offline cold and online hot data processing techniques As the name infers offline data processing can only be accomplished when the data is in consistent state the operating system and all the applications are completely shut down Actually it is the most preferable way of image creation or Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 27 data cloning since software can obtain an exclusive right to process data that guaranties high level of operating efficiency However the offline data processing is absolutely out of question when dealing with 24 7 production environments In contrast online data processing enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified It is particularly useful for systems with high availability requirements but it won t be accomplished until all active transactions are complete The point is to provide a coherent state of all o
217. mber of crucial benefits e Upto 128 primary partitions for the Windows implementation only 4 in MBR e The maximum allowed partition size is 18 exabytes only 2 terabytes in MBR e More reliable thanks to replication and cyclic redundancy check CRC protection of the partition table e Awell defined and fully self identifying partition format data critical to the platform operation is located in partitions but not in un partitioned or hidden sectors as this is the case with MBR uEFI Boot Challenges Introduced back in 2005 by Intel to lift restrictions of the old MBR Master Boot Record and PC BIOS Basic Input Output System uEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface is now a recommended platform for new 64 bit Windows 8 computers And the reason is easy to catch besides other unique features impossible for the traditional tandem of BIOS MBR only a uEFl based platform enables to accommodate Windows OS on a partition larger than 2 2TB Despite all uEFl advantages however it has one quite naughty issue a pretty standard operation with a bootable device for instance involving its connection to another SATA port results in unbootable Windows You ll get the same result if trying to boot from a cloned system hard disk or from a restored hard disk All these problems originate from the way UEFI GPT bundle is organized Microsoft provides how to guides to tackle this type of problems but they demand a great deal of experience from th
218. me E 10 9 GE 4 7 ME G 1079 2013 6 16 13 AM Local Disk C 477 GB 5 2 GE i j G 1079 2013 5 5497 AM Local Disk C 499 6 GE 5 1 GE g j Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 15 9 GB Free space 467 7 GB File C arc_091073737 5597 60 arc_09707 3737559760 pfi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 131 Look in Local Disk C EX p Hame Size Date Local Disk C le ac 091013125156058 10 9 2013 5 52 57 AM arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 6 22 51 AM b arc 091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM AB 2rc_09101 3133756622 pbt 47MB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM __ are_0910131 33756622 pti B76 KB 10 9 2013 6 39 02 AM i are 01014144F REETI mfra TERR 107 970014 A 4007 Ahd x Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume E Comment Mo co
219. me F 499 9 GB 18 5 MB EE Ho 1 F 10714 2013 2 18 38 4M File level Archive 4 2 MB j J 1071472013 2 78 79 4M File level Archive 4 2 MB 23 KB E 1 T 10 9 2013 10 26 43 PM Local Disk C 499 6 GB 3 8 GB LE No 1 g 1079 2013 10 26 07 PM Basic WBA Hard Disk 1 VMware YMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew FOO GB 14 4 MB Mo 1 To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 106 Look ir E New Yalume E Eal 4 F Mame Size Date ER arc new 10 16 2013 10 14 35 PM fe Jarc_new pbf 264 5 KB 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM gt J arc_new pfi 22MB 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM Jarc new _0100p 000 EME 10 16 2013 10 14 24 PM 2 a arc_new_O100p ptm TERE 10 16 2013 10 14 24 PM i __jarc_new_0101p 000 12MB 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM 2 a arc new 0101p pfm 1 2 KE 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM z Jarc new _0102p 000 28 6 MB 10 16 2013 10 14 32 PM Hela larc new 0102p pfm 4766 10 16 2013 10 14 31 PM Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Basic MBA Hard Disk 1
220. me Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4959 6 GB Used pace 9 7 GB Free space 489 9 GB 6 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 148 Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev g ei Local Dis C Seo GENTES Total size 290 3 GB Basic HER Hard Disk T Free 219 6 GB Backup Capsule 219 3 GB Used 60 6 GB Virtual SCS Disk Dev 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 7 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Any
221. mment is available Volume label New volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File C arc 0910131337566227 arc _ 091013133756622 pbf Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see contents of the selected partition archive Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Hame Size Date H ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM f arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM f arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM f arc 101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM f arc 101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM f FerfLogs 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files x86 1079 2013 11 01 16 PM E ProgramData 1079 2013 11 01 18 PM E a System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM T Ki Users 9 3 2011 3 2 48 22 PM di Administrator 10 9 2013 10 26 37 Pe 4 as Default 6 22 9013 12 11 25 PM AppData 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM a di Desktop 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM aM OB ocuments 6 22 9013 7 45 52 AM E J Downloads oe 2013 8 36 30 AM Favorites 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Links 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Music 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM E di Pictures of ee
222. n a file system e g as a special hidden file Thus it is able to contain a relatively large amount of text in multiple languages Partitioning Scheme is a set of rules constraints and format of the on disk structures to keep information on partitions located on a hard disk There are known several partitioning schemes The most popular of them is the so called DOS partitioning scheme It was introduced by IBM and Microsoft to use multiple partitions in the disk subsystems on IBM PC compatible computers Another popular partitioning scheme is the so called Logical Disks Model LDM that originates from the UNIX mainframe systems Veritas Executive accommodates a simplified version of LDM to the Windows 2000 operating system Windows 2000 and XP support two quite different partitioning schemes the old DOS partitioning scheme and the new Dynamic Disk Management DDM The problem is that earlier versions of Windows do not support DDM In addition most hard disk utilities do not support it as well Recovery Media is a CD DVD disc a USB flash card or even a floppy disk from which you can boot for maintenance or recovery purposes Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 222 Root Directory is the top level directory of a formatted logical drive to include other files and directories In modern file systems Ext2 Ext3 NTFS and even FAT32 it does not differ from other directories This is not the case for old FAT12 a
223. n integrated set of powerful tools that is specially designed to tackle most of the problems you might face while using PC Its functionality covers all aspects of a computer life cycle beginning from carrying out all the necessary partitioning operations to install the system from scratch and providing its data reliable protection to secure utilization of an outdated hard disk In this manual you will find the answers to many of the technical questions which might arise while using the program Oo Our company is constantly releasing new versions and updates to its software that s why images shown in this manual may be different from what you see on your screen What s New in Hard Disk Manager 14 e Complete uEFI support Below you can find only new features introduced in this version A 64 bit Windows OS system configured to the uEFI boot mode can be adjusted to successfully start up on another hard disk during copy restore accomplished directly under Windows Previously the uEFI fixup was only available under WinPE A 64 bit Windows OS system configured to the uEFI boot mode will successfully start up in a virtual environment after P2V migration The Linux based recovery environment supports systems configured to the uEFI boot mode e Enhanced backup format Paragon introduces a pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive format a special VHD optimized for storing backups of virtual and physical machines It s very efficient in handl
224. n the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 129 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive It includes a full description of properties about the partition In addition there is the possibility to modify backup settings To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page Archive Content Name Type File system Size Used Lacal Disk C Primary MTFS irer GB 32GB Archive Details Name Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB Change backup settings 5 On the Backup Destination page select where you want to place your backup image There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GE Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space
225. nables to define up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns The Mask spinner control allows you to set a two figure hexadecimal character value 00 by default The available range is from 00 to FF You can also choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 93 Wipe parameters IY Mask joy Pass count Mask hl _ Pass count Mask hl _ Pass count ma dF i alr Mask jon Pass count i Pass count for the group of patterns 1 0 Werhy wipe results Percentage of sectors to check f1 e Revise your changes This page informs on all the actions to be made in the wizard in a bright graphical form Your hard disk before the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i bk E Local Disk C i E data Z e247 GB NTFS 274 9 GE NTFS Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev oe Unallocated 499 9 GB Wizard Result After the operation is completed you can see a well informative summary page providing structurally divided in depth information on all the actions made in the wizard SOFTWARE GROUP s Paracon paracon Data Sanitization Report Customer Information Person User Company Report Info
226. nch the Boot Manager Setup Wizard after the installation has been completed to fix this issue Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Moving Resizing Partition The Move Resize Partition function allows you to resize or change location of any partition without destroying its data In order to move resize a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Move Resize Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Define parameters of the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 86 Gar Are you sure you want to move resize system volume Cj Tou are about to moveresize NTFS volume No label C Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E o Local Disk C 2 47 GB NTFS Volume size 230 114MB 19 261 MB 230 114 MB Free space before 0 Bytes 2 0 bytes 270 852 MB Free space after 0 Bytes a 0 bytes 270 852 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that don t contain any data This allows you to keep the partition s content after move exactly as it was but will require more time Volume size Define size in Mb of the modified partition e Free space before Define the partit
227. nd FAT16 file systems Serial Number In the DOS partitioning scheme every hard disk and every partition has a 32 bit serial number represented by an 8 figure hexadecimal value It is stored in the MBR and its value is assigned when the MBR sector is initialized by Microsoft standard disk managing tools such as Windows Disk Administrator and the FDISK utility In fact a hard disk s serial number is not important for most operating systems and software It is known that Windows NT 2000 and XP store its value in the database of assigned drive letters A partition s serial number is stored in its boot sector in FAT16 FAT32 and NFTS file systems Its value is assigned when the partition is formatted It does not play an important role for most operating systems and software as well Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
228. nd number of passes 1 US DoD 5220 22 M US Department of Defense recommends to overwrite all addressable locations with a character its complement and then a random character Finally the target data area is to be verified 2 US Navy standards NAVSO P 5239 26 e NAVSO P 5239 26 for RLL encoded drives At first to write the fixed value Oxffffffff to the target data area then the fixed value Ox27ffffff and then random values Finally the target data area is to be verified e NAVSO P 5239 26 for MFM encoded drives At first to write the fixed value Oxffffffff to the target data area then the fixed value Oxbfffffff and then random values Finally the target data area is to be verified 3 British HMG Infosec Standard No 5 At first to write a single character pattern then its complement and then a random character Finally the target data area is to be verified 4 German VSItR Standard Overwrite the deleted information 7 times consistently filling it with the following patterns 0x00 OxFF Ox00 OxFF 0x00 OxFF OxAA Finally the target data area is to be verified 5 Australian ASCI 33 Overwrite with a character C then verify Overwrite with C the first pass character s inverse then verify again Overwrite everything with both C and C once again but without verification Fill everything with random characters 6 Russian GOST R 50739 95 Destroy information by a single pass with writing random characters into
229. nformation on backup archives can be obtained with the following tools Using the Restore Wizard e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject At first the wizard displays the Welcome page simply click the Next button at the foot of the dialog window The next page refers to Browse for Archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Browse for Archive show at j SE Type CreaionDate SouceDbiect Size 10 9 2013 10 33 47 Pe Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev n00 GB Lal Switch to File view m Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File C arc new pi To continue click Next Cancel To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description including e Information ona type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 52 e Whether the archive is password protected or no
230. ng the convert operation NTFS stores file names in Unicode while FAT FAT32 uses ANSI to save short file names also called the DOS aliases The codepage information is required for the correct conversion of non English file names from Unicode to ANSI and vice versa An incorrectly chosen codepage will certainly result in corruption of non English file names e Request confirmation of settings before NTFS lt gt FAT FAT32 conversion Mark the checkbox to automatically display the local settings dialog to check and modify if necessary the default parameters before launching the convert file system operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 46 Copy Backup Exclude Options ae Exclude from Copy Backup Specity masks for files and folders that must be excluded from copybackup operations Files that contains your e mail data 9 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category wab Delete filter pab Delete filter _oab Delete filter _pst Delete filter ost Delete filter _dbx Delete filter log Delete filter HZ Delete filter contact Delete filter Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter Add category Change general backup options In this section the program enables to specify what data should be automatically ignored durin
231. ngly recommend you to password protect your backup Protect archive with password Please enter a password Password E Contin password NU Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 122 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive To back up a dual boot Mac Mac OS X and Windows XP Vista 7 8 and then place the resulted image to an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here WWW pa ragon softwa re com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer It will be automatically started up into the Linux recovery environment Normal Mode since it s the only mode that provides support for Mac computers 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager 5 Launch the Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu of the program Wizards gt Backup Wizard Partition Wizards
232. nsnocenes 135 Correcting EFi parane cers vilawcccmsshswemat osc ia twiehctssin vvb davon adieu d dun hel sine ivcennslationa Lvaahelsed alias a wa belanieels 135 COrrectine BED Boot CONmeUTAtiON Datla oinen nann nn A ead vha ew asa ee ee ee 136 Fixie VVC OWS StArECD dO MEY cscs cscs ett a sac ce dos races altace E E 137 Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule cccccccesssccccesscccceesececeeseccceeuscceseuseceeeeeecesseeeceesseecesseeceesenes 140 Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD cccccccccccccceeeseseseceeeeccccccsseeeeeeuueeeeesseeeeeceecessseeeeeeeeeaaegs 142 Restoring a system partition Trom a NeEtWOrkGNiVecaaccseadieceen aie ae OUR E RA 145 Restoring a system partition froma local drive neissa ni a A a 152 Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive essssessessseesssrrrsssreresrresssreressrrsssreressreessreressrersseeresereessreresereesseeeo 155 RESTON Mere Ee T ENE A a aA a a aa a N a 157 Restoring a tile Increment toa partition DackUP niusin E i diel a a 160 Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard iSk cccccccssscceeececeeececeneceeeneeceeseeseeceeeueceteneseeeness 162 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD cccccccccccccccccceceseesseseceeeccececcsseeeeeeuueueeesseeeeeeeecesseeeeeeeeeaaaegs 164 Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted syste
233. nt way try not to use it You can delete your backup just by accident or lose it as a result of a hardware malfunction or a virus attack You can place a backup image to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence You can place a backup image to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system However it won t help you in case of a hardware malfunction You can place a backup image to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure You can place a backup image to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Moreover by storing it on a special purpose server you may be pretty sure nothing will happen to it Finally you can place a backup image to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Known Issues on FTP SFTP 1 4 You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default You cannot restore data selectively with Restore Wizard from an FTP SFTP server You can browse an FTP
234. oftware com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded you will see the Universal Application Launcher In general it enables to run components of the product load drivers for undefined hardware or establish a network connection Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 21 Restat Shutdown 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue Basic Concepts This chapter explains terms and ideas that show how the program works To understand these helps to obtain a general notion of the operation performance and makes it easier for the user to operate the program System and Data Protection The data protection issue is a growing cause of worrying for more and more people today Indeed it is hardly to find a person who will be particularly happy when all precious information on the hard disk is irreversible lost as a result of its malfunction So how this tragedy can be prevented
235. ogram Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 527 5 MB Read so far 582 0 MB 44 8 MB s To copy 10 0GB Write so far 582 0 MB 33 8 MBIs Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 22 Time to finish 00 08 48 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 2 from file arc _091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pfi Data writing 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a bootable DVD disc That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on CD DVD when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Insert a CD DVD disc containing the previously prepared backup image into a CD DVD drive the BIOS must be enabled to boot the system from the CD DVD device Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 143 0O This scenario implies that you have got a bootable archive on your CD DVD In case the backup image is stored on several CD DVD disks please insert the first one 2 Restart the computer 3
236. on please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy hard disk operation e The hard disk to copy Select a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk will be copied to the destination you will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Fi Local Disk C 499 6 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p g DA A Utils G 75 114 4GB 310 5 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey if Use exclude masks Dont estimate size after excludes Mark this option to save time needed for migration with excludes operation if target hard disk ts larger than amount of uted space in partitions on source disk Disks of smaller size Will not be used as a possible destinations To choose the destination hard disk click Next Use exclude masks By default the program doesn t take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog If you need to use them please mark the checkbox and see existing specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard Don t estimate size after excludes You can save time by suppressing calculation of the resulted amount of data to copy after using excludes Please note however
237. on a hard disk otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Hide Unhide Partition The program allows you to hide unhide primary and logical partitions By default an operating system does not mount hidden partitions thus preventing access to their contents In order to hide unhide a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hide Unhide Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation 1 It is strongly recommended not to hide the system partition Otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Set Label of a Partition The Partition Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector It is detectable by any partitioning tool and is used for notification purposes only In order to change a partition label you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Volume Label Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Enter a label for the selected partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Softw
238. on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios Migrating system to a new HDD up to 2 2TB in size Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 66 Cloning Partitions You can duplicate partitions to protect oneself from downtime in case of a system malfunction or for cloning sample partitions The program enables to duplicate all partition data including files the exact structure of directories and file system metadata location of files security information access quotas etc The Copy Partition Wizard will help you copy a partition of any file system To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Partition Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy partition operation e The partition to copy Select a partition you want to copy On this page you can choose a volume to copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev ae Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Basi
239. on on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 194 The Following unpArELELoOned sj up Windows I Oo Installation of Windows XP will make Windows Vista non bootable 12 Launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard As your Windows Vista is non bootable any more you need to install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager Oo To avoid double installation please use our recovery media to activate Boot Manager 13 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 14 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR Boot menu cotions Normal mode 7 Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds it O Hidden mode Time to display the BootManager statup message 15 seconds Choose a hot key for startup Boot Manager Fi Tw 15 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Windows XP Windows Vista As this very situation is ver
240. on the hard disk So choose whether to merge them all and place at the beginning of the disk or at the end by selecting the required operation from the pull down list Merge free blocks options Do not merge free blocks N r Merge free blocks at the end of the disk Do not merge free blocks Ta Merge free blocks at the beginning of the disk Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests you just to remove references to the selected partition from the Partition Table lt i Are you sure you want to delete volume F Tou are about to delete volume F Local Disk NTFS four computer may na longer boot or work correctly Please enter the volume label to confirm deleting e Enter the volume label to confirm deleting To confirm deletion of the selected partition enter its Volume Label The current volume label is displayed above e Donot ask volume label next time Mark the option to inhibit confirmation next time you start the dialog Result By default the operation takes only a fraction of a second However the program waits until Windows completes the modification of the disk layout Advanced Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish advanced partitioning operations Merging Partitions The Merge Partitions Wizard enables to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions or additionally separated by free blocks into a single larger partition The order
241. onsistency and then verifies whether the on partition data meet the Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 8 requirements of the desired file system or not After having passed the testing the program re organizes the file system metadata and user files The program enables to convert the following file system types FAT16 32 lt gt NTFS NTFS lt gt HFS In order to convert a file system you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert file system There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Convert button to confirm the operation Gar Are you sure you Want to convert system volume Cy a You are about to convert file system on volume C No label NTFS our computer may no longer boot or work correctly Please select new file system FAT se Select new cluster size fe Tower oe e New file system From the pull down list choose a file system you would like to convert to Actually the program only displays variants available for the operation taking into account the current parameters of the selected partition and limitations of the used file syste
242. onuenraunedsaancawarteaes neck cacanacarassesiesncinaeaeobenecteoareatenee 108 Creating the BaCkU Capsule atsscec chairs teats alan Sah acta a Madetp agin cih lave Cand taavast arise a A es 108 Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule ccccccssssccccsssccccesececceseccceeseceseeseceseeeeceeseescceseuecesseneceeeeees 110 Backing up a hard disk or partition to external Media CD DVD ccessseseeeceeeececcccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeecesseeeeeeseeaaeees 112 Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive ccccccsssecccceseccccesccecaesececeueceeeeeseceseusecessueecesseeceeseesecetsuecesseges 114 Backing up es toan PLP SE RP SCV CT ciliate E ncet ei bead EA O E E A cad galt daxetteatuaube dung 119 Backing Up adual boot Mac to an external USB GrivVerinc cuca adie eee a A lee 122 Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned Partition ccceeccceeeeeecseseeeeeeeeeeeens 124 Creating a differential to a full partition Backup 2 0 eecccceessccccessececeesececeeneceeeeusececseececsueecessenseceseunecessunecetseneceeseneeeetas 127 Creating a file increment to a full partition DACKUP cccccessccccessececcesececceecceeeusececeuececsusecesseuscceseusecessunecetsegeceesegeeeetes 130 Creating an increment to aTull Tile backup einccctehacadundicioiniinininendiad ache aod iene 133 RECOVENY Scena lOS scanna aden cccuascacecanceusunenacaoenadecancnuacacssncesasnceuaeeuenaeeate
243. opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 6 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 133 Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht exclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mst Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxiliary files 18 filters Add fiter Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter emr Delete filter SS 7 XIIL Fisl ea Gilka 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 8 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected partition archive containing information specified in the wizard It is placed into the same destination as th
244. or You can find it in PTS DOS as well On the Wizard s Welcome page select the Search for Windows installations to correct option Please choose the operation Search for Windows installations to correct Correct Master Boot Record MBR Correct partition boot record Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD O Modity partition parameters To begin click Next On the next page choose the required Windows installation from the list of found installations if several then select the Edit the Boot ini file option If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 138 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refers to a system partition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry NM Partition Status Root System 1 DiskO PartitionO S B WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties Correct drive letters in the System Registry Edit the Boot ini file Correct partition boot record Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 6 Examine the file maybe that s where the problem is If it contains a mistake correct it by us
245. ory Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter msi Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxihary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter _temp Delete filter en Delete filter log Delete filter dmp Delete filter Add category In this section you can find a lot of ready made exclude filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be ignored during file based backup operations thus you specify the data you d like not to be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button 4 Filter Browse Description You can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards rh path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reser
246. p The term backup originates from the time when the best way to protect valuable information was to store it in form of archives on external media It s become now a general notion to mean making duplications of data for protection purposes Bootable Archive is created by adding a special bootable section when backing up the data to CD DVDs Thus you will be able to restore the data from these archives without having to run the program but by simply booting from these CD DVDs Cluster is the smallest amount of disk space that can be allocated to hold a file All file systems used by Windows organize hard disks based on clusters which consist of one or more contiguous sectors The smaller the cluster size the more efficiently a disk stores information If no cluster size is specified during formatting Windows picks defaults based on the size of the volume These defaults are selected to reduce the amount of space that is lost and the amount of fragmentation on the volume A cluster is also called an allocation unit Extended Partition is a partition type you create only on a basic MBR Master Boot Record disk Extended partition is used if you want to create more than four volumes on a disk since it may contain multiple logical drives File System Metadata The servicing structures of a file system which contain information about allocating files and directories security information etc are named the file system metadata It is invisible fo
247. paragon software com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager You can find it in PTS DOS as well 4 Inthe main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Hard Disk Partition Wizards Help Basic Hard Disk O VMware Virtual 500 GB i Ea Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Virtual 500 GB Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB sea Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic Hard Disk 1 Model VMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Used Free Volume label Active Basic Hard Dis
248. parate files or folders encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain It can create an exact image of a partition It enables to automatically build up contents of including its service data Thus it is ideal for a the future backup image by using an advanced backup restore of a system partition or a fast system of filters deployment to a bunch of identical computers It allows archiving data of the same volume with different backup policies It is easy and efficient when creating backup chains Demerits Resulted backup images may contain a lot of It depends on a file system structure so you redundant data won t be able to process unknown file systems It is ineffective when trying to maintain a backup It cannot be used to back up a system partition chain especially when little amount of data is being changed It is much slower when processing large amount of data Backup Types At the present moment the market is offering various types of backup imaging to meet the needs of any user Besides supporting them all our program offers a unique backup type called File Increment to a Sector Backup Full and Differential Sector Backups A full sector based backup image includes all contents of a partition or a hard disk at the moment of its creation If you roll back your system to the initial state on a regular basis that s exactly what you re looking for But if you want to ha
249. partition press D 238591 AB Disk at Id on bus 8 on atapi HBR Fartitionl Inactive O0O8 2 Boot Mani 88700 AB 1824197 ABR free Partitioneg PAT Se 7 6 H 19659 4 9 So if everything is OK you ve got to have by this moment Windows XP successfully installed Your Windows Vista however is still non bootable To fix this issue you need to launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard To do that please install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager To avoid double installation please use our recovery media to activate Boot Manager Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 191 10 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 11 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR Boot menu cotions o Normal mode J Timeout for booting last used configuration 15 seconds Hidden mode Time to display the Boot Manager startup message hoose a hot key for stanup B nage 12 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Traditional way This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence 1 Inthe main window select your hard disk on the Disk Map to make a block of free space on
250. partition your drive first as it requires a separate primary partition Install New OS Wizard This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Install New OS Wizard There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate option to create a new primary partition on your hard disk ii n A A i re tn tal se 6 or m7 Where would you like to instal an operating systen wart to create a new pimay partition to instal OS A new partition wil be create ce of your hard disk or unused space of existing partitions tt is the most preferable way as no system or user s data wil be affected during the installation process Ae wart io use an wosing Pamary panton to mata U5 n case creaton of a new primary partition is not possible there are already four primary partitions on the disk or not desirable you are free to select any of exdsting pemary parttions Please note that al dats on the selected partition wil be deleted f you choose to format t later in this wizard Besides make sure no operating system has already been installed on that partition 4 Onthe next page of the wizard define size of the new partition If t
251. pen files and databases involved in a process taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks As a result an online data processing cannot boast high operating speed Our program supports both offline and online methods of data processing As far as online method is concerned it offers its own hot processing algorithm together with the possibility to use snapshot technologies provided by the Microsoft VSS framework Paragon Hot Processing Technology Paragon Hot Processing is an online copy backup technology for Windows NT family operating systems Developed back in 2001 nowadays it is integrated with all copy backup solutions offered by the company Paragon Hot Processing is not exactly a snapshot technology though it has much in common with it During an online copy backup the program uses the kernel mode driver HOTCORE SYS to intercept and control disk write activity of applications and the operating system The hotcore driver as an integral part of the program is installed during the setup procedure that s why the system reboot is required to complete the setup procedure For the most part the driver is in the idle mode until it is activated with the program While in this mode it bypasses any calls having no effect on the overall system performance but a few kilobytes of the system memory Paragon Hot Processing technology offers copy backup of locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating sy
252. perating system from scratch on every one of them It is enough just to configure one and then clone it to the others Drive Partitioning As you probably know a hard drive is to be split into one or more partitions since it cannot hold data until it is carved up and space is set aside for an operating system Until recently most PCs used to have just one partition which filled the entire hard disk and contained an OS The situation has changed however thanks to new cost effective high capacity hard drives thus opening up numerous possibilities for PC users such as editing video archiving music backing up CD images etc Huge increase in space is great but it poses a number of problems most important of which are effective data organization and speed Large drives are always going to take longer to search than smaller volumes and an operating system is going to have its work cut out both finding and organizing files It is for this reason that many people decide to invest in multiple hard drives but there is an easy solution drive partitioning Partitioning lets you divide a single physical drive into a number of logical drives each of which servers as a container with its own drive letter and volume label thus enabling the operating system to process data more efficiently Besides partitioning makes it possible to organize data so that it is easy to find and manage You can set aside for instance 40 GB of a 160 GB hard drive for the OS
253. pim are_111013111635639_0201p 000 Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Local Disk C Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Used pace 10 5 GB File radare 091013125156058 pbt Hame Comment Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Size 1 1 GE 20 9 ME 110 3 KE 215 8 KE 29 2 ME 1 1 GE 110 3 KE oof ME Total size 4959 6 GB Free space 489 1 GB To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set Date 10710 2013 6 55 53 PM 10710 2013 6 55 52 PM 10710 2013 6 55 54 PM 10710 2013 6 55 54 PM 10710 2013 6 55 56 PM 10710 2013 6 53 57 PM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM 10710 2013 9 33 57 PM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM 10710 2013 9 33 49 FM 10710 2013 9 33 49 PM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM 170 5 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data Hick the check box next to any file or folder you want to restore from Name ane G Local Disk E Partition 499 6 GB Lpg A Recycle Bin a E arc 111013105844785 E Documents and Settings E Image Storage A PerfLogs E Program Files E ProgramData E System Volume Information E Windows E autoexec bat File 24 Bytes bootmgr File 417 6 KB
254. plorer is a handy tool when you have different file systems on the disk whether they contain an operating system or just data Volume Explorer will let you explore a file system of any type and provide access to the necessary files and directories regardless of their security attributes e Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection on a bootable recovery media either to save a backup of a partition hard disk or just several files on a network computer or retrieve a previously made backup from a network computer for recovery purposes e Boot Corrector to fix most of the system boot problems that can be a result of a human factor program error or a boot virus activity Oo Boot Corrector is only available for the bootable recovery environment Supported Data Erasure Algorithms e US DoD 5220 22 M e Custom algorithm To know more on the subject please consult the Data Security Standards section Supported Technologies Along with using innovative technologies from outside Paragon has developed a number of its own original technologies that make its products unique and attractive for customers e Paragon Hot Backup technology to back up locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements e Paragon Hot Copy technology to copy locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing bot
255. ps to clone a hard disk e Undelete Partition allows recovery of accidentally deleted partitions e Wipe Wizard enables to destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories e Express Resize Wizard enables to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition e File Transfer Wizard allows coping files folders to another disk or a partition as well as recording them to CD DVD e Boot Corrector helps to correct the Windows System Registry without Windows being loaded e Network Configurator enables to establish a network connection under Linux If you are going to use network resources first launch the Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection e Log Saver helps to collect and send the necessary log files to the Technical Support e View the mounted partitions the list of all mounted partitions will be displayed The Linux DOS recovery environment assigns drive letters to partitions the way it is done in DOS i e one after another primary partitions at first Thus mounted partitions may have different drive letters from Windows e Eject CD DVD e Command Line allows experienced users to execute any operation e Reboot the computer e Power off the computer To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard Safe Mode When the Safe mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It
256. puter By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 151 Speci where you d like to restore Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev g o Hew Volume E 470 4 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev fi o Unallocated 499 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Unallocated 743 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Object details Name Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 6 GB Free space 10 5 GB All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 7 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey fi E New Volum
257. r Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Filter Browse Description G You can use wildcards and to specify the mask cred e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 8 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 127 Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht exclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mst Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete catego
258. r f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the orginal location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 5 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 6 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 160 Restoring a file increment to a partition backup Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble because of a virus attack But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a local disk Besides you make file increments of your documents and e mail database to that backup ona regular basis That s just enough to easily roll everything back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition with a file increment from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment archive to your system partition backup e By cli
259. r only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process 12 Click Copy to initiate the migration process When the operation is over first check up Windows OS starts up from the target SSD If yes delete the Windows OS partition from the source disk then re partition the disk according to your needs Migrating system to a new HDD up to 2 2TB in size Let s assume that you ve bought a new hard disk that is up to 2 2TB in capacity It s faster and of much higher capacity than your current system disk so it s quite natural you start thinking about system migration We can help you do that To migrate your system to a hard disk that doesn t exceed the 2 2TB capacity limit please do the following 1 Connect both source and destination disks to the computer 2 Turnon the computer 3 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Select Hard Disk to Copy page select a source disk a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk Will be copied to the destination you will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Local Disk C 499 6
260. r to customize the screen layout Data Backup and Rescue In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to establish a reliable data protection system Creating Backup Images Depending on a type of information you need to protect and the way this information should be processed the program offers a number of handy backup wizards To make your job with the program as easy and convenient as possible all backup wizards share similar work algorithm By going through steps of the wizard you configure all the necessary settings to launch the backup operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 56 Smart Backup Wizard Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup chapter to know more on the subject There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview Smart Backup Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the backup operation e The object to back up Click on a section you find answering to your task Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the addre
261. r users and regular applications because its accidental modification usually makes a partition unusable Hard Disk Geometry Traditionally the usable space of a hard disk is logically divided into cylinders cylinders are divided into tracks or heads and tracks are divided into sectors The triad of values Sectors per Track Tracks per Cylinder Amount of Cylinders is usually named the Hard Disk Geometry or C H S geometry Tracks and cylinders are enumerated from 0 while sectors are enumerated from 1 These disk parameters play an essential role in the DOS Partitioning scheme Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 221 Modern hardware uses an advanced scheme for the linear addressing of sectors which assumes that all on disk sectors are continuously enumerated from 0 To allow backward compatibility with older standards modern hard disks can additionally emulate the C H S geometry Hidden Partition The concept of a hidden partition was introduced in the IBM OS 2 Boot Manager By default an operating system does not mount a hidden partition thus preventing access to its contents A method of hiding a partition consists in changing the partition ID value saved in the Partition Table This is achieved by XOR ing the partition ID with a 0x10 hexadecimal value Master File Table MFT is a relational database that consists of rows of file records and columns of file attributes It contains
262. re Primary partition O disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 Data writing Opening archive Img_D3_0301p 000 Restore Primary partition 1 disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0301p 000 Data writing Close 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Restoring a file increment Let s assume that you re busy with developing some project and you make file increments of it on a day to day basis not to lose valuable information So you ve got a file backup chain One day you understand that the job of the last three days is a complete and utter failure Don t give up recover your project to the state when everything s ok To restore a file increment please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 158 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all S Ee Ek 1071072013 6 55 43 AM File level Archive 24 EB 389 Bytes 7 10 10 2013 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 71 9 ME 1071072013 6 48 07 AM Fi
263. re done with that click Next to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 197 Welcome to the Migrate OS to SSD This utility will help you copy the operating system programs and data to another HOD or 550 A Before you begin please note the following Migration process will delete all the data on the target disk so please make sure you ve saved all the information you need before migrating Due to technical reasons this tool cannot migrate OSes installed on dynamic volumes We are sorry For this 7 Leam more about migrating OS T All data stored on the destination disk will be lost during the operation Please save it to another location beforehand 5 The wizard will scan your computer for system partitions that accommodate any of the supported Windows OSes If several are found it will let you specify which operating system you d like to migrate Please select an OS to migrate r Microsoft Windows 6 1 64 bit Edition on Local Disk 0 3 NTFS 499 4 GB 13 4 GB used T Microsoft Windows amp 64 bit Edition on Local Disk Es NTFS 499 4 GB 10 5 GB used k 6 Depending on your choice it will then automatically pick one or two on disk partitions Windows 7 may have Microsoft System Reserved a special hidden partition that contains boot critical files while in the uEFI GPT mode there will be another hidden partition called EFI System Partition and prompt you to select a d
264. ree space Active Inactive attribute Hidden Unhidden attribute The Disk and Partitions List is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on the list the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Context sensitive Menu The Context sensitive Menu shows a list of operations available for an object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or the Disk and Partitions List If you click a corresponding record the appropriate wizard or dialog will be started All default values for the operation parameters will correspond to the object s settings If there too many items on the list type in the first word of the required command in the Search commands field to filter the list Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 37 Back Up Partition Burn Partition on COL DVD or BD Copy Partition Restore Partition Format Partition Delete Partition Move Aesize Partition Convert File Syster Defragment Partition Defragment MFT Compact MFT Change Volume Label Hide Partition Mark Partition as Active Properties Panel The Properties P
265. required location The wizard will then match the device with drivers inside the given location and pick the right one Et J archive_db 8 7 2013 1 23 35 PM PerfLogs 7 14 2009 6 37 05 AM Program Files 8 7 2013 10 38 32 AM I Python31 11 3 2009 3 32 46 PM Users 11 3 2009 3 01 47 PM J Windows 11 3 2009 3 31 23 PM eH Drive D iI te E a Driver Directory A device driver has been found Press OK to install this driver Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 207 Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp Primary IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp Intel A 237148 EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device z 3 N YHware Accelerated AMD PCHet Adapter Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device ie Mware SCSI Controller gwinn scsi int te e Manually add a driver for a device that has not been found by our wizard by clicking then specifying the required INF file Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Please select an INF file nettpsmp inf 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM e E nettsbnt inf 32KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM e E netupard inf 45KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM g netvt 6 inf 4
266. rimary partitions on a Hybrid Retained GPT MBR disk e There s not enough free space on the selected partition free up to 50 MB e The selected partition has an unsupported file system currently only NTFS and FAT file systems are available for splitting To detach OS from media files please do the following i Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Split Partition Wizard The first page of the wizard informs the user on the upcoming operation Please read all notes carefully before you proceed Once you re done with that click Next to continue Select a volume you want to split up Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev If the wizard cannot work with the selected partition you ll get a corresponding O notification click on the More Info link to see the details Split operation can t be performed over this partition More in 4 When selecting a system partition just our case the wizard notifies that this type of operation may cause inability of the operating system to start up if moving system files folders to the new partition So please take it seriously If you re sure confirm the operation ATTENTION You are trying to split system partition Make sure not to split system foldersffiles otherwise system will not be able to boot anymore Would you like to continue 5 Mark checkboxes next to files folders you d like to move to the n
267. rk the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key file Browse Private kep file Browse Passphrase Login Enter a login Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name which can be modified however You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default 6 When ready click the Connect button to check out you ve got access to the provided location If yes you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backup At this stage you can also edit the default archive name if necessary Archive location itp master paragon software com paragon ie ie 4 Name Size Date e CASTRATO HiDrive master paragon sofhyare com E 2china E 2nvidia E AST_Fress E Biglobe E Carbonite E Cisco E Continuum E dialogic E Drofa E Focalbeo_3 4 103 FR Z Archive details Archive name jarc_1 11013120552346 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive g Ry No commen 8 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we stro
268. rmation Report Date 101420173 1 28 04 AM Version Paragon HOM Internal version 10 17 0787 77 08 10 13 System Information Save report Print report The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 94 To make sure that all on disk data is irreversibly destroyed call the Disk Viewer dialog by clicking the appropriate tab and see it for yourself Oz0000 Oz0010 Oz0020 Oz0030 Ox0040 Oz0050 Oz0060 Oz0070 Oz0080 Oz0090 Oz00A0 Ox00B0 Oz00C0 Oz00D0 Ox00E0 Ox00FO Oz0100 Oz0110 Oz0120 Nard An Please select sector number First Previous gt Next E gt Last ee oe a me Ds te Oy Po KS or b Sees poo H miO mH WD COM g i Eh w Lel Oo The Summary page will be available only when the Virtual operations are disabled Available operation scenarios e Hard Disk Utilization Task Scheduling Automation of operations can really help you out when you ve got to accomplish certain routine operations on a regular basis as it enables to execute them without your involvement while optimizing your computer s work load Setting a Timetable Thanks to the embedded Scheduler you can set a timetable for execution of any operation It has two categories for time settings these correspond to appropriate items in the Schedule
269. rt up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 115 3 On the What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions BREE EEC a Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File sstem Size Le Ef My Computer My Computer v E Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes Master Boot Record MER 0 Bytes c Local Disk Primary NTFS 350MB 2 te Local Disk C Primary NTFS 250 3 GB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal
270. rtitions and move their contents to new locations Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Redistribute Free Space Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 80 There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation Partition to enlarge Select a partition the size of which will be increased at the expense of other partitions Blocks of the free space if any will be automatically added to the target partition Choose a volume to expand Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l g o Local Disk C p o Local Disk 224 7 GB NTFS 274 9 GE NTFS G Capacity of the volume C is 224 7 GB The wizard can expand this volume up to 499 5 GB at the expence of other volumes How will the wizard expand the volume e Partition to donate Choose any partition s not only adjacent to donate free space Select volumes to take space from Free space from that volume will be used to enlarge the volume pou have selected on the previous page Wolurnie File system Type Capacity Used pace Free space Free Co There iz no unallocated space on the hard disk you have selected The wizard can only expand the volume C at the espence of some other volumes Please click the check box next to any volume
271. ry bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter emr Delete filter h i ai zi__ en en ea 2 ons 9 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Ft Ry No comment 10 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we strongly recommend you to password protect your backup Frotect archive with password Please enter a password Password E Contin password NU 11 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process i This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a differential to a full partition backup To update an image of the selected partition please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Differential Backup 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 128 e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp be Ee amp 10 9 2013 11 29 07 Pe Local Disk C 477 7 GB 26 7 GB J 107 972013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB 309 Bytes J 10
272. ry media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here Oo www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 163 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA Ext4FS 10n Disk 1 NEWYVOLUME F My computer an i Root dir i iMyComputer My computer et imnt Mounted resources i imntdisk Local disks
273. s Type image of the hard disk Archive path imntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbf Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 To continue restore process click Next 9 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic Hard Disk3 Mi Model VMware Virtual Size 120 GB N Volume Type File System Size Volume label Active Hidden D Primary NTFS 143 GBE WNewVolume Wo No 1 Primary NTFS 8 4 GB New Volume Wo No Z Primary Free 37 3 GB No No Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 157 1 All contents on disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk3 Your disk before operations a J Your disk after operations i ae 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress Operation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Copied so tar 8 9 MB Read so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Write so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 06 Time to finish 00 00 00 Restore Disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbt Opening archive Img_D3_0300p 000 Resto
274. s connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous e Use Active Mode only for FTP Mark the option if your provider requires this type of authentication e Allow Open SSH key based authentication only for SFTP If your provider requires this type of authentication mark the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key file Browse Private kep file Browse Passphrase e Login Enter a login e Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location e Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name which can be modified however You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default By clicking the Connect button the provided location will be checked If ok you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backups Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 51 Viewing Disk Properties The Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List are the main tools to get information on the properties of hard disks and partitions available in the system To know more on the subject please consult the corresponding chapters of the Interface Overview chapter Viewing Image Properties General i
275. s reserved 140 pe Reporting To view the Operations performed Operation 1 Correct partition boot record Partition targeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 27 52 your computer he program Operation 2 Change drive letters Partition targeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Info System Root folder is WINDOWS Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 28 39 Save 13 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 14 Reboot the computer Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got the bootable backup capsule containing a backup of your hard disk That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your hard disk from a backup image contained in the backup capsule when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the bootable backup capsule By default the program offers to use the F1 hot key to boot from it This scenario implies that the backup capsule is bootable 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period
276. s to partitions in the Partition Table leaving all file data intact In fact there are a number of programs available to successfully recover previously deleted partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 31 Formatting a drive also does not guarantee data destruction Formatting procedure implies modification of the Master File Table MFT that keeps track of where file contents are stored on the disk and verification of each sector for consistency Even a low level format does not actually erase the file contents for good since they can still be resurrected from their deleted state with minimal effort by using the popular today Magnetic Force Microscopy technology The only way to make sure that all the data has been erased from a hard drive is to overwrite all on disk sectors with random patterns of ones and zeros Although this sounds complex there is an easy way to do this The process of deliberately irreversibly removing or destroying the data stored on a memory device magnetic disks flash memory drives etc is generally known as Data Sanitization A device that has been sanitized has no usable residual data and even advanced forensic tools should not ever be able to recover it thus providing maximum level of security Data Security Standards To irreversibly destroy all on disk information there have been developed a number of disk sanitizing standards They are distinguished by wiping patterns a
277. se Boot Corrector Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 137 7 Restart the computer Fixing Windows startup ability Let s assume that due to an unknown reason your Windows fails to complete the startup procedure At first everything seems quite OK you can see the standard startup messages on the screen but at some moment it hangs up To fix your Windows startup ability please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here WWW pa ragon softwa re com my accou nt To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period In the Linux launch menu select Boot Correct
278. se make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager 3 Inthe main window select your non bootable Windows partition on the Disk Map U Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive 250 Gb a C NTFS Vista k Basic Disko Model VMware Virwal IDE Hard Drive Size 250 Gb File System Size Used Free Volume label N Volume Type Basic Disk 0 Size 250 Gb i ae Primary NTFS 200 Gb 1 7 Gb 199 Gb Vista 1 D Primary FAT 32 49 7 Gb 24 9 Mb 49 6 Gb Ma label 4 Unhide the partition by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Unhide Create an image of partition Restore partition from image AltR Volume label Copy panition AC apy panition 199 Gb Vista 496Gb No label fe as Format Delete Wipe partition A acie Clear free space Convert 1 label Resize Move Unom Change cluster size Maodity li I Retest surface 5 Only for the Windows XP Windows Vista scenario you need to make the system partition active as well by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Set Active Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 196 NTFS No label Create an image of parition ard Drive Size 40 0 Gb ye Restore partition from image AR Used Free Shh a i
279. selected object by the right mouse click then select Mount the Selected Archive There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected backup image Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Car Assign a drive letter had This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assignment Is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter s7 However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation It is strongly recommended not to un mount backup images with Windows Disk Manager or other third side software Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a backup image you should take the following steps 1 Selecta backup image in the Archive Database 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Unmount the Selected Archive Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 104 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed
280. size partitions proportionally Mark the checkbox to copy the hard disk in the secfardpeseciar mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as welll This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Oo The Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process 8 On the Revise Copy Results page review all parameters of the operation Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 201 Original hard disk Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i t Local Disk C 499 6 GE NTFS Hard disk copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Local Disk 749 6 GE NTFS Proportional resize the copy will take 750 GB 100 of target disk space Min Copy Size 10 8 GB Max Copy Size 750 GB Select the range of the disk space that will be occupied on the destination disk with i i Ki copied partitions 9 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 10 When copying is completed shut down the computer 11 Disconnect physically the source hard disk 12 Boot the computer from the destination har
281. sk Drive r50 GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 1 7 fi Master Boot Record MER 0 Butes pal The size of objects to back up 280 3 GE Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate Oo checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 6 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to the Backup Capsule option Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 112 There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to local network drives f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space delete outdated backups from the Backup Capsule or resize it with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a shor
282. ss book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder SJ Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions E mail to create a file based backup of e mail databases accounts and address books of MS Outlook MS Express and Windows Mail Media Files to create a file based backup of all media files photo video music etc stored in the My Documents folder Documents to create a file based backup of all office documents stored in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of any files and folders If selecting Disk or Partitions or Other Files and Folders you will need to specify more exactly the object of operation To know more on the subject please consult the Backup Scenarios chapter e Name and location of the resulted image Provide a file name for the new image and its exact location The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 57 Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name
283. ssociated with the restored partition Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter E e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Fae new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive Oo The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Restoring Hard Disk T All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey j l j fi Unallocated 471 4 GB Hard Disk Restore Options Copp data and resize partitions proportionally In this mode the Wizard changes the size of partitions in the same proportion with keeping intact their relative order This option can be useful in restoring an image of hard disk to a larger one Perform surface test Set this option if you want the Wizard to perform the surface test on the target hard disk In this case if the program finds bad and unr
284. stems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements i It is not recommended to use Paragon Hot Processing with active SQL Server Exchange or Oracle databases since the backup image contents may be corrupted Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS is designed to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Initiated by a VSS aware copy backup utility VSS creates snapshots for the selected volumes and represents them as virtual read only devices called volume shadow copies Once the shadow copies are created the copy backup utility starts processing the data while applications keep writing to original volumes Unlike Paragon Hot Processing the VSS technology provides a unique possibility to make a synchronous snapshot of multiple volumes This very feature can be particularly beneficial when backing up active SQL Server 2003 Exchange 2003 or Oracle databases located on multiple volumes the way it is recommended by Microsoft to improve the level of database performance and reliability thus providing 100 percent data consistency Oo To use VSS it is necessary to
285. t e The date when the archive was created In addition there are some special graphical flags to indicate crucial properties FLAG FUNCTIONALITY Disk archive Partition archive File archive rai MBR archive System archive Encrypted archive Compressed archive Complex archive Filtered archive Differential archive Incremental archive ee File increment to a partition archive To easily manage images in the Archive Database the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Refresh the contents of the database Show only existing archives Add the selected archive to the database Delete the selected archive from the database Besides you may filter backup archives to decide whether to show only file partition or hard disk archives To do that please select the required filter in the left top corner of the page Browse for Archive show at gt amp B Ee Show all a a how disks he 4204PM Mew Volume E Show partitions Show file archives 1 42 21 PM NEW YOLUME F Ls 10 9 2013 10 47 54 PM NEw VOLUME 10 9 2013 10 33 47 PM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware Source Object Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 53 By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window Browse for Archive Look ir E Local Disk C AX F Local Disk C Ge arc new 10 9 2013 10 34 00
286. t or a power outage there are several techniques that correspond to the options below Do not protect No protection but maximum performance If you re not 100 sure you re completely safe from a power outage or an accidental reset of your computer please do not use this option Reset Standard protection with acceptable performance Maintaining a special journal our program enables to automatically complete a data sensitive operation interrupted by an accidental reset of your computer from our bootable recovery media thus reviving the corrupted partition Power loss Maximum protection but minimal performance Besides journaling our program will also disable cache of your disk when accomplishing data sensitive operations to avoid data loss even in case of a power outage Backup Image Options we Backup Image options W Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific data that will later be used during restore to check the archive integrity It can show down the backup operation W Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Normal compression Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable image size Image split Enable image splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Maxinurn split size fi ME This section contains a set of options that will be
287. t Windows versions but unavailable for old versions of Windows 98 ME AT 72000 Additional options f Always use hot processing f Use hot processing only when partition is locked Hot processing temporary drive LC oo Number of attempts to start W55 3 Timeout between attempts in seconda 120 Change run during backup options In this section you may configure the hot processing mode Enable hot processing Mark the checkbox to enable the so called hot data processing mode that is specially designed to process data without restarting your operating system Hot processing technology From the pull down list you can select the required hot processing technology Always use hot processing Select the option to process partitions without making them locked Thus you will be able to keep working with them as usual Use hot processing only when partition is locked Select the option to use the hot processing only when partitions are locked and cannot be processed without restarting the computer Please keep in mind that once you start any operation on a partition in this mode it will automatically be locked by the program thus you won t be able to keep working with it as usual Hot processing temporary drive Here you can select a disk drive that will be used to store the temporary hot backup data by default C Attempts to start VSS Here you can set how many attempts to start Microsoft VSS the program is to
288. t comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then burn the resulted image to CD DVD please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 4 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name
289. t this step to get the most out of the system additional drivers when dealing with Windows XP Server 2003 because for these systems Though all Windows systems have built in driver repositories please be prepared to have they are very modest Technology Application Let s consider a number of situations when the Adaptive Restore technology can help you out e If you need to migrate to a different hardware platform with minimal effort e If you need to upgrade hardware while keeping all programs and settings intact e If you need to replace failed hardware and cannot find an exact match for original system specifications Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 26 Known Issues 1 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to different hardware you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 2 If you ve installed several operating systems on one partition we can only add drivers to the latest version of OS Microsoft highly recommends that you install an operating system on a separate partition 3 Please note drivers are not cached during selection That s why if you select a driver to add to the system but it s already unavailable during the operation the program will end the operation with an error System Virtual
290. ta size mla Calc 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list a Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so far 11 8 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 03 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDDO Partl arc_091013131559760 Item 1 of 2 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 to HDDO Partl arc_091013131559760 Item 2 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and burn it to CD DVD when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu sel
291. ta will be stored Select the Burn data to CD DVD item Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CDIDVDIBD Choose this option f you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 8 Onthe Choose a Recorder page select a recorder from the list of available devices and then set a volume label by entering it in the appropriate field Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 166 Select a recorder to burn data to Vendor Product Type NECVMWar VMware IDE CDR10 CD R CD RW C Paragon CD Burner Emulator CD R CD RW Paragon DVD Burner Emulator DYD R DVD EF lt gt Volume label My Data 9 Onthe Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list F Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so far 0 02 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Creating compilation image Used burner VMware IDE
292. taken into account during backup restore operations Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 40 e Control archive integrity Mark the checkbox to guarantee that all backup images created with the program are 100 percent flawless If you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Set image file names automatically Mark the checkbox to make the program automatically set a file name for every volume of a complex backup image Otherwise you will need to do it manually during the backup operation e Compression level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for backup images that will be used by default e Enable image splitting Mark the checkbox to automatically split every backup image to volumes of a particular size Oo Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of some file systems e Maximum split size With the spinner control you can specify a maximum size for backup volumes General Copy and Backup Options General copy and backup options HDD raw processing Copy an entire hard disk sector by sector without taking into account its partition structure Partition raw processing Copw Backup each partition sector by sector All sectors will be processed one by one even Unused sectors Requires more time to complete the operation W Skip archive files stored in ar
293. te a partition More info The number of available methods depends on your disk layout Oo To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard Create Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition destination Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then choose position for the future partition on the disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions On this page vou can select hard disk and the place where to create a new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Local Disk C 99 6 GE NTFS Basic The partition will be created here ware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev E Local Disk A f49 9 GE NTFS Use the buttons to move the marker or drag marker by mouse A new partition will be E gt created where the marker ts ol ee By default the program allows you to create a new partition only as the last primary or as D the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems Partition size There is no restriction on size of the future partition merely depending on space available on the hard disk If there is not enough free spa
294. ters of existing formatted partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 102 Assign Drive Letter In order to mount a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Assign Drive Letter Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected partition Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Gay Assign a drive letter This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assignment is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter Z However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Remove Drive Letter There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the sub
295. the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in Log files In order to send log files to the Paragon Support Team you should take the following steps 1 Click Tool Button then select Send Log Files 2 Provide a customer name and a product serial number 3 Give a detailed description on the encountered problem Send log files Please enter short description of your problem and send log files to support Customer Mame J ohn Smith Seral Number 09fde 654ec a49fc 7daf8 237a2 Content of inquiry Help Send Cancel By clicking the Send button the built in mail client will generate a template request with attached compressed log files and then send it to the Paragon Support Team Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents Oo The Send Log Files function is only available when outgoing mail server SMTP and the user e mail address are properly set To learn more about it please consult the Settings Overview chapter View Logs With a handy dialog you can study logs on any operation carried by the program To make this job as easy as possible all
296. tical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources For pVHD images e Backup to VD Wizard to protect separate partitions or entire hard disks Restore Facilities e Restore an entire disk separate partitions or only files you need from the previously created backup image for PBF and pVHD e Restore with Shrink to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Adaptive Restore to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Oo This feature is only available for the bootable recovery environment Copy Facilities e Migrate OS to SSD to move any Windows OS since XP from a regular hard disk to a fast SSD Solid State Drive even of a smaller capacity thanks to advanced data exclusion capabilities e Partition hard disk copy to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability Copy functionality can also be used as an alternative way of data protection Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 11 Virtualization Facilities e P2V Copy to migrate a Windows physical system to a virtual environment in the online mode a Virtualization
297. tion Burn Partition on F E Local Di pe E Hew Yolume OE 21 2 GE N amare oe GE NTFS ed Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CO OVD or BD Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Di A Restore Partition Unallocated Format Partition 499 9 GB Delete Partition Mlowe Resize Partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI D Unallocated 749 9 GB Assign Orrve Letter Hide Partition Make Partition Pri Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI D aaa a Change serial Number a Unallocated Chanana Mait ma IT 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 177 Gar Are you sure you want to move resize volume 17 You are about to moveresize Linux Ext4 volume New Yolume 7 Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Unallo O New Volume 170 2 GB Linus Ext Volume size 174 285 MB v 23 992 MB 239 925 MB Free space before 65 640 ME O bytes 215 932 MB Free space after 0 Bytes O bytes 215 932 MB Sector to sector move Select this option to move partition areas that
298. tition ou can specify this folder name in a field below Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E o System g o Data E k t Utils G 2 1 GB NTFS 266GB NTFS 32 GE NTFS Specity a folder name to keep content of right partition Folder Hame merged_pattition_content To review the changes click Next 1 If a system partition is the right one of the selected pair Windows OS will become unbootable after the merge operation is over Result After the operation is completed the disk space of the two adjacent partitions will be consolidated Redistributing Unused Space between Partitions Express Resize Partitions Wizard The Express Resize Partitions Wizard enables to easily increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of your hard disk Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize Partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 79 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to resize Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to redistribute the unused space between as the right one will be selected automatically The wizard will resize space between Local Disk C and d
299. tly CD or DVD By collecting all these drivers in one folder you can let the wizard automatically pick and install only those required for your OS Select Search for drivers in a specific folder Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 203 The wizard has failed to find drivers for some devices What would you like to do Search for drivers In a specifie folder gt Specify a local or network path to the missing drivers Ignore all missing drivers Continue to adjust the 05 without injecting the missing drivers Which devices have missing divers Click on the link at the bottom of the page to see what boot critical devices have no drivers Oo The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanumeric code which is very convenient 9 Though you ve got the option to continue without injecting missing drivers for boot critical devices The Ignore all missing drivers option we strongly recommend you not to do it Otherwise we cannot guarantee your Windows will start up on the new hardware There are no drivers for the following devices a nen p23 1AB EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller 8 Primary IDE Channel 8 Secondary IDE Channel You have chosen ta ignore these devices and continue with the OS adjustment Your OS will not start up on the new hardware if there are no drivers for boot critical devices Are pou sure vou want bo continue 10 The
300. to look for the deleted partitions f Quick search for partitions created by Vista or later OS f Conventional search f Thorough search y Show file systems search options Oo To know more on the available search methods please use the context sensitive hint system e File system filter By default the wizard will search for all known file systems However by clicking on the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard you can specify only those file systems you need amp Hide file systems search options FAT and FAT 32 file systems W NTFS file systern Linus file ystems Ext Exts and E t4 Apple HFS Other unlisted file system To begin search click Next e A partition to undelete if several By default the program searches records of any deleted partition ever existed on the selected block of free space So you can get several partitions to choose from Search deleted partitions from sector OxUOOOU00000000801 to sector OxO000000000rt rrr CC Gee aaa eee The following partitions have been found File system Type Capacity Used Space Used GntTrs Primary 7 9 GB 35 9 ME 0 Most likely the required partition will be found first If so you may abort the search operation by pressing the Stop search button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 83 Installing a New Oper
301. tual S SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris E la Basic MBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris m g Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VHD image Virtual Image Virtual Hard Disk Drive E Local Disk Primary 4 Specify the guest OS and a virtualization software vendor If your system hosts several Windows OSes our wizard will find them all and automatically patch to run in a virtual environment However we cannot guarantee smooth startup of all found Windows systems for their configuration parameters may be incompatible with each other This is why we additionally prompt you to specify what operating system you d like to use as guest to configure the virtual machine for that particular system Specifying Virtualization Software Vendor Page The following OS will be used as guest Ey Windows amp x64 Edition Please select a virtual software vendor VMware Workstation VMware Fusion f Microsoft Virtual PC f Oracle VirtualBox Oo Not all vendors may be available to choose If capacity of one of the selected objects exceeds the maximum virtual disk capacity of any vendor this vendor will be shadowed 5 Set properties of the future virtual machine e Virtual machine version Please make sure you choose a version which is supported by your virtualization software otherwise you won t be able to work with the newly created machine e Virtual machine name By default the wizard picks t
302. umber of echo requests to send Start Load from file Save to file Apply Cancel e Donot resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display IP addresses instead of hostnames e Maximum number of hops to search for target By default the utility goes through maximum 30 hops when searching for the target host which you can modify however e Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply By default the utility waits 4 seconds for each echo reply message If not received within the timeout an asterisk is displayed Saving log files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in log files To prepare a log files package please do the following 1 Click Log Saver 2 Provide an e mail address used for registering the product then give a detailed description on the encountered problem in the corresponding text fields Please don t worry we respect your privacy so none of your confidential data will be exposed This utility only collects the program s operation logs to help our Support Team find and tackle your problem Click Next to
303. users That is due to some definite advantages it can offer First of all many people clone hard disks just to back up data for security reasons The present day copy utilities enable to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 30 service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability In case of a system malfunction the user can get the system back on track in minutes No additional configuration is required what is very convenient The second possible application is the upgrade of a hard disk to a new one The capacity of a modern hard drive doubles every two years thus opening up new possibilities for software developers As a result programs become more complicated and require considerable amount of free space One day the user realizes that there is no more free space left on the hard disk and the only way out is to upgrade Usually that means that besides purchasing a new hard disk the user is to face a large re installation procedure spanning several days of tedious work But all of this can be avoided just by copying the contents of the old hard disk to a new one proportionally resizing the partitions And the last but not least is the copying of hard disks for cloning purposes It may be of great use when setting up similar computers There is no need for a system administrator to install an o
304. ve multiple backup archives of the same partition reflecting certain time stamps unchanged data will inevitable be Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 23 duplicated in all archives and take additional space on backup media To tackle this issue there has been developed a supplementary technique called Differential Sector Backup A differential archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full archive which forms a base or a parental image in this case thus considerably saving your system resources It is realized by the exact bit wise comparison of the previous partition s data saved in the parental image with the current data that is actually the partition itself To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials what is very convenient Differential Base to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Full Sector Backup Monday restore point Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point n i This function is only available for single primary and logical partitions Full and Incremental File Backups A full file based archive only contains files and folders It is really efficient when backing up an e mail database or particular documents as no redundant data is processed But if you care about maintaining a files history you can benefit from one more supplementary technique called Incremental File Backup An in
305. ve data to localnetwork drives f Save data to physical partitions C Save data to FTP locations fe Burn the data to CD OVD or BD 6 Select a recordable device on the list of available CD DVD devices and edit the archive name if necessary Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 114 Select a recorder to burn archive images to Name Dic types 23 HE CY Mar VMware IDE CDR10 CO FRAM DYD R RW DVD RAM JAIS CD Bumer Emulator CD R 2 5 DVO Burner Emulator DYO A A W Archive details Archive name BPOS O13 Mo more than 6 symbols and only in English Estimated archive size 3 1 GB Oo Please take into account the Estimated archive size value It can give you a hint about the number of CD DVD discs required for the operation 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commen 8 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following For PBF images 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup Oo There are other ways to sta
306. ved 48 Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not File Backup Include Options fe 5 Include into file backup archive Specity masks for files and folders that must be added to archives Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category chm htm mht html pdf txt hip rtf doc Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter _ docx Delete filter Xl xlsx WTI pp pptx Yad Ydy Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Add category In this section you can find a lot of ready made include filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup dl images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be processed during file based backup operations thus you automatically ignore files that do not match so they won t be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button E Filter Browse Description gt You can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards de men rh path are not allowed In the opened
307. verting Basle IVIBR TOG didevncsratecncsuadeune E a a E A E 90 Updatn AMBER eena T E E E T ee eee ee ee 90 WIDE Tasks scsenscscrcerscsncnpeucsaloutoucsstencesewscniepneumonacnteudeussadamesaesuennesuwepeaseesaniwensnieancauseeesesnwamesacedeadeoneuienacsusanetes 91 Task Schedu ling insisi N A a 94 Serie S AED Eaa AA E ON 94 Marnagine TASKS earn E a E E E E A E E ae 95 creatine SCS NS Mas anini A A a a 97 Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved EXE a PUNCTIOMANICY Sipe edenecicsiesa tee tidstesendalccswansdeideticcusisuladunccavandauieulecteauevu a A A EAEE AE O ANES 97 View Partition Hard Disk Pro perlies ax teecceaieh boats Cotscavedie iatamieneared A a h hi ee a caacatoa 97 VOICE EXO ORGN us e esc ttieaacs i anecde ou tacawseauscceuueaaen S 98 ZVP E Fe WIZ Certs neat here EAEE P A era ai laud E I acd E E EEE TEE E RI NEE E AEE 100 MOUNGP a rITIO D ccctesdemcsncc senna stetmesiata E E E A 101 MONCALVO cennera E E E E E EA EE EAE E O E sca 102 TeSt SUIE cas a a E A R an Mea eat etent heats tetademiaat ots 104 CHECK FIC SVSTCM IN EEr Y sita estos tinct nchco E A N E EA 104 CAECKAR NIVE OE E ia E E EE E OOP Cea E E ee 105 CHEEK RECOVERY DISCS aisina a N A A A 106 SONG LOE FES eeno E N E ia Seca E E A E E E 107 VIEW LOR Seica E E E ual ee ainel ek 107 TYPICAL SCCM ailOS a as aeseanseenaenacestetansasoumunemebensauasoutenaeseamameesomenenseses 108 Backup Scenarios sccsvcisscrncisinducmiesctoacsnasacauanuesiaaiedncuaesnactosn
308. way you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Backup Capsule 219 3 GB 2 Local Disk H 132 3 GE NTFS OOOO Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 1969964 10263 ME 196996 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partitions E OME Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter iz 8 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer For pVHD images 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Boot Media Builder to prepare the WinPE recovery environment which you can get here www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Select Switch to Full Scale Launcher then click the Restore from VD item of the Wizards menu 3 On the Restore Wizard s W
309. ws XP as the second operating system Initially allocated space for the Windows partition has turned out to be insufficient for your current needs The only way out is to take some space from your Mac partition thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions To increase size of the Windows partition by taking unused space from the Mac partition please do the following 1 Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Express Resize Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 188 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 The wizard will automatically select Windows the NTFS file system and Mac the Apple HFS file system partitions of your Boot Camp configuration The wizard will resize space between leopard and Local Disk C on Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 Mware VA ware Yirtual SCSI Disk Dev Select left partition from a pair of adjacent partitions you would like to resize Aight adjacent partition will be selected automatically Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey On the disk map you can also see the GPT service partition called EFI as well as a 128 megabyte free block between Mac and Windows partitions made with Boot Camp It s just for your information 4 Increase size of your Win
310. ws installation disc to write a standard code to your flash drive 7 When trying to back up my system the program asks to restart the computer Most likely the Hot Processing mode is disabled Please make it active in the program settings 8 When backing up a partition with the VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service mode the program throws VSS could not be started for processed volume Most likely you try to back up a FAT32 partition which is not supported by VSS Please use the Paragon Hot Processing mode instead 9 cannot back up my hard disk to an external hard drive Once started the operation is aborted with the following error Hard Disk management Error Code 0x1100a What is wrong here The problem is that the Microsoft VSS service is set as the default Hot Processing mode in the program But this service has not been started in your WindowsXP Windows2003 Vista Please start this service right click on My Computer gt Manage gt Services gt find Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service and make it active Set also to start it automatically 10 When running a backup operation with the Paragon Hot Processing mode enabled get an error error code 0x1200e Internal error during Hot Backup Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 11 When running a backup operation with the Microsoft VSS mo
311. x to suppress automatic update of BCD Boot Configuration Data after copy restore operations Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 41 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Copy Backup Exclude Options CD DVD BD Recording Options CD DYD BD recording options Burm even CO DWYDBO disk to the end Choose this option to allow the disk to be copied by third party tools Recording speed Maximum recording speed Fast recording Choose this option if you have good quality disks and recorder Boot options Specity a bootable 150 image to place on CO DYO or BD along with backup data booted iso A The specified 150 image does not exist Specity how would you like to boot from CO DYO or BD Do not boot from CO OVO or BD ISO image folder Browse Please select a folder to place 150 images to when CD OVD of BD ISO maker i used This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during CD DVD BD burn operations e Burn every CD DVD BD to the end By default the program does not create ISO 9660 compliant burning sessions as it processes data on the fly and can only estimate the resulted session size That s why no third party tool will get access to the recorded data To tackle the issue mark the checkbox to make the program create a standard Disk at Once session It may slow down the burning process as every CD DVD BD wil
312. y close to the previous one please use the Windows Vista Windows XP scenario However please take into consideration one more step you need to accomplish if you decide to use the traditional scenario 1 Besides hiding of the system partition before installation of the second OS you need to make it inactive as well To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the corresponding dialog Click the Yes button to continue Are pou sure you want to set the volume az inactive You ate about to set the volume WinkP NTFS a inactive You compute may no lorgar boot coenecthy tT ee ui 4 164 8 GB NTFS E NTFS E Fatz2 E Fate Linus Et Lira Ext Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 195 Reviving the system partition In case you are not able or not willing to complete the mentioned above scenarios but have already reached the point when all changes are applied and everything is ready to install the second OS please do the following to make your system bootable once again only relevant for the traditional scenario 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder or Boot Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image You can get these utilities here Oo www paragon software com my account To automatically boot from the recovery media plea
313. ypical Scenarios This chapter lists a number of the most frequently used scenarios that may be accomplished with the program You can find here useful recommendations and descriptions of operations Backup Scenarios Creating the Backup Capsule 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Manage Capsule 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a place on the disk where the backup capsule will be created It can be created as a primary partition or as a logical drive within an extended partition It can be inserted into any place on the hard disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions Copyright 1994 2013 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 109 On this page vou can select a hard disk where a backup capsule will be created as well as the relative position of the capsule on the Hard disk Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Ga Local Disk C 499 4GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey a Unallocated 499 3 GB Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Unallocated 749 5 GB Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey E au T u a JL a Use the buttons to mowe the marker Backup capsule will be created where the marker iz By default the program allows the user to cr

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  orreLog® - CorreLog  Ambiella  RCA 7L400MDV DVD Player User Manual    GE 131-10595-2 1-07 JR Music Mixer User Manual  Targus DEFCON® VPCL  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file